JP6767337B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a slot machine capable of playing a game.

As a game machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when the game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something that can be done. Further, a variable display device capable of variable display (also referred to as “variation”) of the identification information is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result in the variable display device, the gaming state (game). There is a machine (so-called pachinko machine) configured to give a predetermined game value to a player by changing the state of the machine (specifically, the state in which the game machine is controlled).

Further, after setting a predetermined number of bets for one game on a predetermined game medium, the player operates the start lever to start variable display of the identification information by the variable display device, and the player changes each. By operating the stop button provided corresponding to the display device, the variable display of the identification information is stopped within the range of the maximum delay time predetermined from the operation timing, and the variable display of all the variable display devices is displayed. When a prize is generated according to the display result derived when the game is stopped, a predetermined game medium determined in advance is paid out according to the prize, and a specific prize is generated, the player sets the game state to the predetermined game value. There is something that is configured to give to (so-called slot machine).

The game value means that the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the game machine becomes advantageous for the player who is likely to win a prize, or becomes advantageous for the player. It is to generate rights and to be in a state where the conditions for paying out prize balls are easily satisfied.

In the pachinko gaming machine, as a display result of the variable display of the special symbol (identification information) started in the variable display device based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning opening, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed. If it is done, a "big hit" will occur. The derived display is to finally stop and display the symbol (final stop symbol). When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening opens a predetermined number of times to shift to a big hit game state in which a hit ball is easy to win. Then, in each opening period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) is won in the large winning opening, the large winning opening is closed. The number of times the large winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the large winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each large winning opening may be referred to as a round. In addition, a game in a round may be called a round game.

Further, in the variable display device, symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol among the left, middle, and right symbols) are stopped and shaken in a state of being consistent with a specific display result for a predetermined time. A big hit can occur before the final result is displayed because it is moving, scaled or deformed, multiple symbols fluctuate synchronously with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols are swapped. The effect performed in the state where the sex continues (hereinafter, these states are referred to as the reach state) is referred to as the reach effect. In addition, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol that is variablely displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes "off" and the variable display state ends. The player plays the game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

In such a game machine, there is one configured so that a specific effect can be executed by using an effect device. For example, in Patent Document 1, after the display area of the effect display device is displayed and controlled in a non-display state (darkened state), a predetermined optical vortex image is displayed and controlled in the darkened display area of the effect display device. It is described that the light emission effect (specific effect) is executed.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2008-259540 (Paragraph 0849-0850, FIG. 90, FIG. 91)

However, the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 may not always be able to sufficiently enhance the effect of the specific effect when the specific effect is executed.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the effect of a specific effect.

(Means A) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and is a production device capable of performing a production, a movable body that can be operated, and a movable body using the production device. A specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect in the vicinity, a movable body control means for operating the movable body, a detecting means capable of detecting the movement of a player, and a specific display corresponding to the detecting means. The movable body control means can operate the movable body when the specific effect is executed, and the detection means has a first operation and a second operation with respect to the first operation means. The second operation with respect to the means can be detected, and the specific display executing means can detect the first specific display corresponding to the first operation with respect to the first operation means and the second operation means as the specific display. The second specific display corresponding to the second operation and having a higher advantage for the player than the first specific display, and the first specific operation corresponding to the first operation means and the first specific display. It is possible to display a third specific display, which is more advantageous to the player than the display, and during the non-valid period of detection by the detection means, the first specific display is displayed after the first specific display is displayed. 2 The specific display or the third specific display is changed, and during the valid period of detection by the detection means, an operation effect using the changed second specific display or the third specific display is executed, and the non-valid period. When the first specific display is changed to the second specific display after the first specific display is displayed and an operation effect using the second specific display is executed during the valid period, the non-specific display is performed. After displaying the first specific display during the valid period, the first specific display is changed to the third specific display, and the player is more likely to perform an operation effect using the third specific display during the valid period. It is characterized by having a high degree of advantage for .
(Means 1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of performing a game, and is a production device capable of performing a production (for example, a production accessory 201) and an movable movable body (for example, a push). In the specific effect executing means (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100), which can execute the specific effect (for example, the specific effect of the aspect shown in FIG. 37 (5)) in the vicinity of the movable body by using the button 120) and the effect device. A movable body control means for operating the movable body (for example, a part for executing step S8111 in the effect control microcomputer 100), and a detection means capable of detecting the movement of the player (for example, a portion for executing step S8120). A push button 9031B, a stick controller 9031A, a touch sensor, an infrared sensor, a camera, etc., and a specific display corresponding to the detection means (for example, the small button (white) D901 shown in FIGS. 67 and 74 to 80, the large button). Specific display execution means (for example, button) for performing (white) D902, large button (red) D903, stick D904, small button (white) D901U, large button (white) D902U, large button (red) D903U, stick D904U, etc. The movable body control means can operate the movable body when the specific effect is executed (for example, FIG. 37 (3)), which includes the development effect process (S90529), the variable display during effect process (S90172), and the like). ), After the vibration operation of the push button 120 shown in FIG. 37 (5), the specific display executing means performs the first specific display (for example, a small button (white)) as the specific display. D901, etc.) and the degree of advantage for the player over the first specific display (for example, the jackpot expectation, the expectation of 16R probability variation jackpot (see FIG. 49), and the probability variation jackpot when there is a normal jackpot and a probability variation jackpot. When the second specific display (for example, when the first specific display is the small button (white) D901, the second specific display is the large button (white) D902, the large button (red) D903, the stick D904, etc. , When the first specific display is the large button (white) D902, the second specific display is the large button (red) D903, the stick D904, etc., and when the first specific display is the large button (red) D903, the first 2 The specific display can display the stick D904 or the like), and after displaying the first specific display during the non-valid period of detection by the detection means (for example, T4 to T11 shown in FIGS. 71 to 80). The first specific display is the second After changing to a specific display (for example, after displaying the small button (white) D901 as shown in FIG. 74 (C), the small button (white) D901 is displayed as the large button (white) D902 as shown in FIG. 75 (G). (The large button (white) D902 is further changed to the large button (red) D903 as shown in FIG. 75 (I)), and the valid period of detection by the detection means (for example, in FIGS. 71 to 80). In the T11 to T13 shown), the second specific display after the change (for example, a large button (red) D903, a large button (red) D903U, etc. as shown in FIGS. 75 (J) and 75 (K)). (For example, an effect of prompting an operation as shown in FIG. 75 (K) and notifying the result as shown in FIG. 75 (L)) is executed. According to such a configuration, the effect of the specific effect can be improved.

(Means 2) In the means 1, the specific effect executing means can execute the specific effect after the movable body is operated by the movable body control means (for example, the vibration operation of the push button 120 shown in FIG. 37 (3). Later, the specific effect shown in FIG. 37 (5) may be executed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the specific effect before the start of the specific effect.

(Means 3) In the means 1 or means 2, the movable body is an operating means (for example, a push button 120) that can be operated by the player, and the movable body controlling means controls the operating means when a specific effect is executed. The vibration operation is performed (for example, after the vibration operation of the push button 120 shown in FIG. 37 (3), the specific effect shown in FIG. 37 (5) is executed), and the operating means is a decorative member (for example, a decorative member in which the vibration operation can be visually recognized). , The vibrated member 303) shown in FIGS. 2 and 3) may be included. According to such a configuration, the line of sight of the player can be guided to a specific effect by sight and touch.

(Means 4) In any one of the means 1 to the means 3, the light emitting body for the effect (for example, the frame LED 28) and the display means are darkened when the specific effect is executed (for example, FIG. 37 (2). ), The darkening display executing means (for example, the part that executes step S8108 in the effect control microcomputer 100) for displaying the entire display screen of the effect display device 9 (blackout display), and the effect. The movable body control means is provided with a light emission control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S8109 and S8123 in the effect control microcomputer 100) for controlling the light emission of the light emitting body, and the light emission control means turns off the light emitting body for the effect. In this state, the movable body can be operated (for example, as shown in FIG. 37 (3), the effect display device 9 is darkened (blacked out) and the frame LEDs 28 are all turned off. , The push button 120 may be vibrated). According to such a configuration, the player's line of sight can be more effectively guided to a specific effect.

(Means 5) In any one of the means 1 to the means 4, the movable body control means has at least a first operation mode (for example, a vibration time of 1 second) and a second operation mode (for example, a vibration time of 3 seconds). It is possible to operate the movable body by a plurality of types of operation modes including (for example, as shown in FIG. 33, the vibration time of the push button 120 is provided as 1 second, 3 seconds, and 5 seconds). The specific effect executing means differs in the specific effect executing mode depending on whether the movable body is operated according to the first operation mode or the movable body is operated according to the second operation mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 33). When the push button 120 with a vibration time of 1 second is vibrated, the specific effect A is executed, and when the push button 120 with a vibration time of 3 seconds is vibrated, the specific effect B is executed. It may be configured as such. According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the operation mode of the movable body.

(Means 6) In any one of the means 1 to the means 5, a display means having a display area (for example, an effect display device 9 or the like) and a predetermined area of the display area that is difficult for the player to see (for example, an upper area). In step S8003 of the effect symbol variation start process in the effect control microcomputer 100 in the second embodiment, the advance notice effect is performed by the predetermined display control means (for example, in the second embodiment) capable of displaying the predetermined display (for example, a mini image) on 5B or the like. A part that executes the advance notice effect by selecting the corresponding process table and executing the process of step S8005 of the effect symbol change start process and the effect symbol change process (step S802) according to the process table according to the advance notice effect). And the line-of-sight guidance effect executing means (for example, in the second embodiment) capable of executing the line-of-sight guidance effect (for example, a mini image moving in the area Z1) that guides the player's line of sight to a predetermined area in the display area. The process table corresponding to the advance notice effect is selected in step S8003 of the effect symbol variation start process in the control microcomputer 100, and the process and effect symbol change of step S8005 of the effect symbol change start process according to the process table according to the advance notice effect. It may be configured to include a portion for executing the advance notice effect by executing the process (step S802). According to such a configuration, the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions according to the following means 7 to 15. Conventionally, in a game machine, a game machine that displays an operation promotion image corresponding to the operation means during the valid period of the operation means (button, etc.) as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-83473 has been known. There is. In this gaming machine, the operation promotion image may gradually become larger if no operation is performed, or the operation promotion image in the shape of a button may change to the operation promotion image in the shape of a patrol lamp. However, the operation promotion image corresponding to the operation means changes with time, and the operation promotion image does not change when the operation is performed early, so that there is a problem that the effect is poor. In view of this point, it is required to provide a game machine having an improved effect.

(Means 7) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to another aspect is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901, slot machine, etc.) capable of playing a game, and can detect the movement of the player. Means (for example, push button 9031B, stick controller 9031A, touch sensor, infrared sensor, camera, etc.) and a specific display corresponding to the detection means (for example, small buttons (white) shown in FIGS. 67 and 74 to 80). Specific display execution means for performing D901, large button (white) D902, large button (red) D903, stick D904, small button (white) D901U, large button (white) D902U, large button (red) D903U, stick D904U, etc. (For example, button development effect processing (S90529), variable display during effect process (S90172), etc.), and the specific display execution means is the first specific display (for example, a small button (white)) as the specific display. D901, etc.) and the degree of advantage for the player over the first specific display (for example, the expectation of a big hit, the expectation of a 16R probability variation jackpot (see FIG. 49), and the probability variation jackpot when there is a normal jackpot and a probability variation jackpot When the second specific display (for example, when the first specific display is the small button (white) D901, the second specific display is the large button (white) D902, the large button (red) D903, the stick D904, etc. , When the first specific display is the large button (white) D902, the second specific display is the large button (red) D903, the stick D904, etc., and when the first specific display is the large button (red) D903, the first 2 The specific display can display the stick D904 or the like), and after displaying the first specific display during the non-valid period of detection by the detection means (for example, T4 to T11 shown in FIGS. 71 to 80). The first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, after displaying the small button (white) D901 as shown in FIG. 74 (C), the small button (white) D901 is changed to FIG. 75 (G). The large button (white) D902 is changed to the large button (white) D902 as shown, and the large button (white) D902 is changed to the large button (red) D903 as shown in FIG. 75 (I)), and the valid period of detection by the detection means. (For example, T11 to T13 shown in FIGS. 71 to 80), the large button (red) D903 as shown in the second specific display after the change (for example, FIGS. 75 (J) and 75 (K)). And a large button (red) D903U, etc.) to promote the operation (for example, as shown in FIG. 75 (K)) As shown in (L), the effect of notifying the result, etc.) is executed.

According to the above configuration, the effect of production is improved.

(Means 8) In the means 7, the first specific display executes an action effect (for example, a weak action effect, a medium action effect, and a strong action effect shown in FIG. 69 (C)) acting on the specific display. As a result, the second specific display is changed (for example, the small button (white) D901 shown in FIG. 76 (C) is changed to the small button (white) D901 as shown in FIGS. 76 (D) and 76 (E). By executing the weak action effect to display the acting image JS901 and the image JS902, the large button (white) is changed to D902 as shown in FIG. 76 (E), and the large button (white) shown in FIG. 77 (G) is changed. As shown in FIGS. 77 (H) and 77 (I), the D902 shows the image TS901, the image TS902, and the image TS903 that act on the large button (white) D902, and the medium-action effect of displaying the image TS903 is executed. It changes to stick D904 as shown in I), and the small button (white) D901 shown in FIG. 80 (A) acts on the small button (white) D901 as shown in FIGS. 80 (B) and 80 (C). By executing the strong action effect of displaying the image KS901, the image KS902, or the image KS903, the stick D904 may be changed as shown in FIG. 80 (C).

According to the above configuration, the effect effect is improved by the action effect.

(Means 9) In the means 7 or the means 8, there are a plurality of types of action effects acting on the specific display (for example, a weak action effect, a medium action effect, a strong action effect, etc. shown in FIG. 69C). The rate of change to the second specific display differs depending on which of the above-mentioned action effects is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 69 (C), there is no change and there is a change (weak change, medium). Since the determination ratios of the weak action effect, the medium action effect, and the strong action effect are different in the case of (change or strong change), the display changes to the second specific display depending on which button or other action effect is executed. The ratio may be different).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation for the action effect.

(Means 10) In any of means 7 to 9, there are a plurality of types of action effects acting on the specific display (for example, weak action effect, medium action effect, strong action effect, etc. shown in FIG. 69 (C)). There are a plurality of types of display modes of the specific display after the change (for example, large button (white) D902 shown in FIGS. 67 and 74 to 80, large button (red) D903, stick D904, and large button (white). ) D902U, large button (red) D903U, stick D904U, etc.), and the ratio of which change to the specific display is different depending on which action effect is executed (for example, FIG. 69 (C). ), Weak effect effect, medium effect effect, strong effect effect in the case of weak change (1 step change), medium change (2 step change), and strong change (3 step change). Since the determination ratios of each of the above are different, the ratio of weak change, medium change, and strong change is different depending on which button action effect is executed. For example, the small button (white) before the change. In the case of D901, when a weak change is executed, the small button (white) D901 changes to a large button (white) D902, and when a medium change is executed, the small button (white) D901 becomes a large button (red) D903. When it changes and a strong change is executed, the small button (white) D901 changes to the stick D904. Therefore, the ratio of which specific display is changed depending on which button or other action effect is executed. Is different).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation for the action effect.

(Means 11) In any of the means 7 to the means 10, there are a plurality of types of the detection means (for example, push button 9031B, stick controller 9031A, etc.), and the detection means is detected by the detection means corresponding to the specific display after the change. (For example, as shown in FIG. 79, the motion effect detected by the push button 9031B corresponding to the large button (white) D902 after the change is executed, and after the change as shown in FIG. 75. The operation effect detected by the push button 9031B corresponding to the large button (red) D903 of the above is executed, and the operation effect detected by the stick controller 9031A corresponding to the changed stick D904 as shown in FIGS. 77 and 80. May be executed).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to pay attention to which operation means the specific display corresponds to.

(Means 12) In any of means 7 to 11, the specific display executing means has the specific display during the non-effective period of detection by the detection means (for example, T4 to T11 shown in FIGS. 71 to 80). Is displayed, the specific display is displayed in an manner indicating that the period is not valid (for example, as shown in FIGS. 71 to 80, a small button (white) D901 on which the regulation line K90 is superimposed, regulation. The large button (white) D902 on which the line K90 is superimposed, the large button (red) D903 on which the regulation line K90 is superimposed, and the stick D904 on which the regulation line K90 is superimposed are displayed).

According to the above configuration, it is easy to understand that the period is non-valid.

(Means 13) In any of means 7 to 12, the specific display executing means displays the specific display over a plurality of variable displays (for example, displays the specific display over a plurality of (re) variable displays as pseudo-continuous variation. , A specific display may be displayed over a plurality of variable displays by pre-reading, etc.) and may be changed.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation over a plurality of variable displays.

(Means 14) A notice effect (for example, cut-in effect, countdown) for notifying that any of the game machines from means 7 to means 13 will be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player. It is possible to execute an effect, a character falling effect, etc.), and when the advance notice effect is executed, an action effect that acts on the specific display is executed, and when the action effect is executed, the second specific display is displayed. It may change.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation for a specific advance notice effect.

(Means 15) The gaming machine of any of the means 7 to the means 14 sets the setting state related to the effect to the first state (for example, the state in which the auto button function is disabled) or the second state (for example, the auto button). A setting means that can be set to a state in which the function is enabled (for example, the auto button setting process shown in FIG. 81) and a specific effect (for example, the button notice effect A) when the effect execution condition is satisfied. ~ C and in the decision button production, based on the detection of the operation of the push button 9031B, the display that reduces the scale of the gauge display, the notice display, the pass / fail display, etc.) can be specified. The specific effect executing means includes, for example, the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 64, and in the first state, the effect execution condition is set based on the detection result of the detection means. While the specific effect can be executed on the assumption that the effect is satisfied, the specific effect can be executed on the assumption that the effect execution condition is satisfied regardless of the detection result of the detection means in the second state (for example, the auto button function is effective). When the push button 9031B is not operated, the notice display, the pass / fail display, the gauge display scale reduction, etc. are displayed), and the setting means is variable display. The setting may be changed from the first state to the second state based on the detection result of the detection means (for example, a portion for executing the processes of steps S907103 to S907104 in FIG. 81). ..

According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the interest from being lowered.

It is a front view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is an exploded perspective view for demonstrating the internal structure of a push button. It is an exploded perspective view for demonstrating the internal structure of a push button. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure example of the game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit composition example of an effect control board, a lamp driver board, and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU executes on a main board. It is a flowchart which shows the 4ms timer interrupt processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit determination table, the small hit determination table, and the big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows the start port switch passing process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the configuration example of the hold storage buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the display result specification command transmission processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process during special symbol change. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of the special symbol display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU. It is explanatory drawing which shows the configuration example of the command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows the variation pattern command reception waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect symbol variation start processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the stop symbol of the effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of process data. It is a flowchart which shows the specific effect setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the specific effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during change of an effect symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during change of an effect symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the effect symbol fluctuation stop processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode of a suggestion effect and a specific effect. It is the figure which saw from the front of the effect display device and the accessory (shown by a dotted line) in the 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 38 is a sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 38 in the second embodiment. It is a figure which shows the movement of the mini-images A-C in the 2nd Embodiment. This is an example of a production screen of a notice effect that announces the degree of expectation of execution of super reach in the second embodiment. This is an example of a production screen for a notice effect that announces the expected degree of jackpot in the second embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to another aspect. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number for a game counted on the side of a main board. It is explanatory drawing explaining an example of a variation category and variation pattern. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the jackpot type determination table. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the effect control pattern. It is a block diagram which shows the configuration example of the data holding area for effect control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning a prize determination process in a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of a start winning a prize. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the random value value determination processing at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the selection example of the variation category determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variable category determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production decision processing at the time of a prize. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is explanatory drawing explaining an example of a button development effect category and a button development effect pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a button development effect decision process. It is explanatory drawing explaining the decision ratio of a button development effect. It is explanatory drawing explaining the determination ratio of the button development effect pattern. It is explanatory drawing explaining various periods in button development production, and the specific flow of button development production. It is explanatory drawing explaining the flow of concrete button development production. It is explanatory drawing explaining the flow of concrete button development production. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an auto button setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the display mode at the time of setting the function of an auto button to enable or disable. It is explanatory drawing which shows the comparative example of the automatic continuous hitting by a long press operation, and the automatic repeated hitting by an auto button function.

Embodiment 1.
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 which is an example of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as viewed from the front.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is composed of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame that is openably and closably attached to the inside of the outer frame. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape provided in the gaming frame so as to be openable and closable. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanical parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (game described later). It is a structure including (excluding board 6).

On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2, there is a ball hitting plate (upper plate) 3. At the lower part of the hitting ball supply plate 3, a surplus ball receiving plate 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply plate 3 and a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball are provided. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-shaped body constituting the game board 6 and various parts attached to the plate-shaped body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 6, a game area 7 in which the driven game ball can flow down is formed.

The member forming the surplus ball saucer (lower plate) 4 is formed in a stick shape (bar shape) at a predetermined position on the front side (for example, the central portion of the lower plate) on the upper surface of the lower plate body, and the player A stick controller 122 that can be gripped and tilted in a plurality of directions (front-back, left-right) is attached. In the stick controller 122, a player holds the operation stick of the stick controller 122 with an operating hand (for example, a left hand) and presses and pulls the stick controller 122 with a predetermined operating finger (for example, the index finger). A trigger button 121 (see FIG. 5) capable of instructing operation is provided, and inside the operation stick of the stick controller 122, a trigger sensor 125 (FIG. 5) that detects a predetermined instructing operation by pushing / pulling the trigger button 121 or the like. 5) is built-in. Further, an inclination direction sensor unit 123 (see FIG. 5) for detecting an inclination operation with respect to the operation stick is provided inside the main body of the lower plate at the lower part of the stick controller 122. Further, the stick controller 122 includes a vibrator motor 126 (see FIGS. 1 and 5) for vibrating the stick controller 122.

The member forming the hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 3 is subjected to a predetermined instruction operation by a player, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side (for example, above the stick controller 122) on the upper surface of the upper plate main body. A possible push button 120 is provided. The push button 120 may be configured so that a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from the player can be detected mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 361 (see FIG. 5) that detects a player's operation action performed on the push button 120 may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 120. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 1, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 are in a vertical positional relationship in the central portion of the upper plate and the lower plate. On the other hand, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 may be moved to either the left or right side of the upper plate or the lower plate while maintaining the vertical positional relationship. Alternatively, the attachment positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 may not be in a vertical positional relationship, but may be in a horizontal positional relationship, for example.

An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. The display screen of the effect display device 9 has an effect symbol display area for variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of the effect symbol. In the effect symbol display area, for example, there is a symbol display area for variably displaying three decorative (effect) effect symbols of "left", "middle", and "right". The symbol display area has "left", "middle", and "right" symbol display areas, but the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. The three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the effect control microcomputer is executing the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a, the effect display device 9 executes the effect display in accordance with the variable display, and the second special When the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed on the symbol display 8b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 in accordance with the variable display, so that it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game. ..

Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol among the left and right middle symbols) continue for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol). It is stopped, rocked, scaled or deformed while matching the combination of symbols), or multiple symbols are synchronized and fluctuated with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols are swapped. The effect performed in a state where the possibility of a big hit continues before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is referred to as a reach effect. In addition, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, if the display result of the symbol that is variablely displayed on the effect display device 9 is not a big hit symbol, it becomes "missing" and the variable display state ends. The player plays the game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

In the upper right portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9, fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d for displaying the fourth symbol following the effect symbol and the special symbol and the ordinary symbol described later are provided. In this embodiment, the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol and the second symbol display area 9c for which the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol described later. A fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol is provided, in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

The 4th symbol for the 1st special symbol and the 4th symbol for the 2nd special symbol may be collectively referred to as the 4th symbol, and the 4th symbol display area 9c and the 2nd special for the 1st special symbol. The fourth symbol display area 9d for symbols may be collectively referred to as the fourth symbol display area.

The variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol is realized by continuing the state in which the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are repeatedly turned on and off at a predetermined display color (for example, blue) at regular time intervals. .. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol are synchronized with each other. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol are synchronized with each other. "Synchronization" means that the start time and end time of the variable display are the same, and the period of the variable display is the same.

On the right side of the effect display device 9, a first special symbol display (first variable display unit) 8a for variably displaying the first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. Further, on the right side of the effect display device 9 (to the right of the first special symbol display 8a), a second special symbol display (second variable display unit) 8b that variably displays the second special symbol as identification information is displayed. Is also provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

The small display is formed in a square shape, for example. Further, in this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both numbers 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display, for example, a number (or a two-digit symbol) from 00 to 99, respectively.

Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol display (variable display unit). I have something to do.

Although this embodiment shows a case where two special symbol indicators 8a and 8b are provided, the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol indicator.

In the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the execution condition of the variable display, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening). After passing through 14 (including winning), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0, and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed). It is started based on the establishment of a state (a state in which the jackpot game is not executed), and when the variable display time (variable time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. In addition, the passing of the game ball means that the game ball has passed through a pre-determined area such as a winning opening or a gate, and the concept includes that the game ball has entered (winning) in the winning opening. Is. Further, the derivation display of the display result means that the symbol (example of identification information) is finally stopped and displayed.

Below the effect display device 9, a winning device having a first starting winning opening 13 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back surface of the game board 6 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 13a.

Further, below the winning device having the first starting winning opening (first starting opening) 13, a variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning opening 14 capable of winning a game ball is provided. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second starting opening) 14 is guided to the back surface of the game board 6 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by the solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is opened, the game ball can win the second starting winning opening 14 (it becomes easier to win the starting winning), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball is more likely to win in the second starting winning opening 14 than in the first starting winning opening 13. Further, in the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is closed, the game ball does not win the second starting winning opening 14. Therefore, in the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is closed, the game ball is more likely to win the first starting winning opening 13 than the second starting winning opening 14. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, it may be difficult to win a prize, but it may be possible to win a prize (that is, it is difficult for a game ball to win a prize).

Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 15 is extremely easy to win in the second starting winning opening 14. The first start winning opening 13 is provided directly below the effect display device 9, but the distance between the lower end of the effect display device 9 and the first starting winning opening 13 may be further narrowed, or the first starting winning opening may be further narrowed. By arranging the nails densely around 13 or making it difficult to guide the game ball to the 1st start winning opening 13 by arranging the nails around the 1st starting winning opening 13, the winning rate of the 2nd starting winning opening 14 It may be made higher than the winning rate of the first starting winning opening 13.

Above the second special symbol display 8b, there is a second special symbol hold storage display 18b composed of four indicators that display the number of valid winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the second hold storage number. It is provided. The second special symbol hold storage display 18b increases the number of lit indicators by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one.

Further, above the second special symbol hold storage display 18b, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first holding storage number (holding memory is also referred to as starting memory or starting winning memory. ) Is provided as a first special symbol hold storage display 18a composed of four displays. The first special symbol hold storage display 18a increases the number of lit indicators by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one.

Further, the display screen of the effect display device 9 is provided with a first hold storage display unit 9a for displaying the first hold storage number and a second hold storage display unit 9b for displaying the second hold storage number. .. In addition, you may be configured to provide the total hold storage display unit which displays the total number (total hold storage number) which is the total of the 1st hold storage number and the 2nd hold storage number. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that do not satisfy the variable display start condition.

The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effect) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. Variable display of the production symbol as the symbol of. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized with each other. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized with each other. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect symbol reminiscent of the jackpot on the effect display device 9. The combination of is stopped and displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 forming a large winning opening is provided on the right side of the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball device 20 is provided with an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. In the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) that occurs when is derived and displayed, the opening / closing plate is controlled to the open state by the solenoid 21, so that the large winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened. The game ball that has won the big prize opening is detected by the count switch 23.

In this embodiment, since the special variable winning ball device 20 is provided on the right side of the game area 7, the player causes the special variable winning ball device 20 to win a game ball in the big hit game state. Therefore, a firing operation (so-called right-handed) is performed aiming at the right side of the game area 7. Even if the gate 32 and the variable winning ball device 15 are provided on the right side of the game area 7, the right-handed operation may be performed even when the game state is a time saving state or a high base state. Good.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a directing accessory 201 that imitates the face of a character or the like is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. An accessory LED 202 is provided in a portion of the effect accessory 201 that imitates the eyes of a character or the like, and a predetermined effect can be performed by lighting and displaying the accessory LED 202 of the effect accessory 201. Has been done. Further, in this embodiment, the accessory LED 202 is composed of a full-color LED, and can emit light in various lighting colors such as white and red, and by sequentially changing the lighting color to emit light. It is also possible to emit light by rainbow color display (rainbow display).

On the left side of the effect display device 9, a normal symbol display 10 for variably displaying a normal symbol is provided. In this embodiment, the ordinary symbol display 10 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the normal symbol display 10 is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. Further, the small display is formed in a square shape, for example. The ordinary symbol display 10 may be configured to variably display a number (or a two-digit symbol) from 00 to 99, for example. Further, the ordinary symbol display 10 is not limited to a 7-segment LED or the like, for example, a display capable of lighting and displaying a predetermined symbol display (for example, a decorative lamp capable of alternately lighting and displaying "○" and "×"). It may be composed of.

When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. Then, when the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol, for example, symbol "7"), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. That is, the state of the variable winning ball device 15 is a state in which the player is advantageous from a disadvantageous state to an advantageous state (a state in which the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening 14) when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol. Changes to. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol hold storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Every time the game ball passes through the gate 32, that is, every time the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol hold storage display 41 increases the number of lit LEDs by one. Then, every time the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of lit LEDs is reduced by 1. Furthermore, the probability variation state is a state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit is higher than that in the normal state (a state in which the probability of being determined as a big hit as a result of the fluctuation display of a special symbol is increased as compared with the normal state). Then, the probability that the stopped symbol on the normal symbol display 10 becomes a hit symbol is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased. Further, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased even in a time-saving state (a game state in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shortened) in which the fluctuation time of the symbol is shortened although it is not in the probabilistic state.

At the lower part of the game board 6, there is an out opening 26 in which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken in. Further, four speakers 27 for producing sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the upper left and right upper parts and the lower left and right lower parts on the outside of the game area 7. A frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided on the outer periphery of the game area 7.

The game machine is a ball launching device (not shown) that drives a drive motor in response to the player operating the ball striking handle 5 and launches the game ball into the game area 7 by using the rotational force of the drive motor. ) Is provided. The game ball launched from the hit ball launcher enters the game area 7 through a ball hitting rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends from the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends and the first (1), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the first starting winning opening 13. Unless the variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the first reserved storage number is incremented by 1 on condition that the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

When the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends and the second special symbol is displayed. (2), the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started on the second special symbol display 8b, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the second starting winning opening 14. Unless the variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the second reserved storage number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

In this embodiment, in the case of a probability variation jackpot, the game state is shifted to a high probability state (probability variation state), and the game ball is easily started and won a prize (that is, special symbol displays 8a, 8b and the effect. It shifts to a high base state which is a game state controlled so that the execution condition of the variable display on the display device 9 is easily satisfied (in this embodiment, it shifts to a time saving state). Also, when the gaming state is changed to the time saving state, it is also changed to the high base state. In the high base state, for example, the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened is increased, or the time during which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened is extended as compared with the case where the high base state is not achieved. It becomes easier to win a start prize.

It should be noted that instead of extending the time during which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state (also referred to as an open extension state), the state shifts to a normal symbol probability variation state in which the probability that the stopped symbol on the normal symbol display 10 becomes a hit symbol is increased. By doing so, it may shift to a high base state. When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (hit symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. In this case, by controlling the transition to the normal symbol probability change state, the probability that the stopped symbol on the normal symbol display 10 becomes a hit symbol is increased, and the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened increases. Therefore, if the state shifts to the normal symbol probability change state, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased, and the starting winning is easy to win (high base state). That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is the hit symbol or the stop symbol of the special symbol is the probabilistic symbol, which is disadvantageous to the player. It changes to an advantageous state (a state where it is easy to win a start). It should be noted that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

Further, the normal symbol display 10 may shift to the high base state by shifting to the normal symbol time saving state in which the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol is shortened. In the normal symbol time reduction state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases. Therefore, as the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases, the frequency of opening the variable winning ball device 15 increases, and the starting winning is easy to win (high base state).

In addition, by shifting to a time-saving state in which the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the special symbol or the effect symbol is shortened, the fluctuation time of the special symbol or the effect symbol is shortened, so that the fluctuation of the special symbol or the effect symbol starts. The frequency of this is increased (in other words, the pending memory is digested faster), and it is possible to reduce the situation where an invalid start prize is generated. Therefore, a valid start winning prize is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility that a big hit game is performed increases.

Furthermore, by shifting to all the states shown above (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time reduction state and special symbol time reduction state), it becomes easier to win a starting prize (shift to a high base state). You may. In addition, by shifting to any one or more of the above-mentioned states (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time reduction state, and special symbol time reduction state), it becomes easier to win a start prize (high base). It may be changed to the state). In addition, by shifting to only one of the above-mentioned states (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time reduction state, and special symbol time reduction state), it becomes easier to win a start prize (high). It may move to the base state).

Next, the internal structure of the push button 120 will be described. 2 and 3 are exploded perspective views for explaining the internal structure of the push button 120. As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, a holding member 302 for holding the vibrated member 303 is provided inside the transparent cover 301 of the push button 120. In this embodiment, one holding member 302 holds all the vibrated members 303. A plurality (13) of arrangement holes 325 for arranging each vibrated member 303 are passed through the holding member 302. Further, the vibrated member 303 and the arrangement hole 325 have a one-to-one correspondence, and the shape of the arrangement hole 325 has a regular hexagonal shape in a plan view corresponding to the shape of the vibrated member 303. Further, the vibrated member 303 is inserted into the arrangement hole 325 from below. On the outer peripheral surface of the lower end portion of the vibrated member 303, a protruding edge portion (not shown) is provided so as to prevent the member from coming off from the arrangement hole 325. Since the protruding edge portion is projected, the diameter dimension of the lower end portion of the vibrated member 303 is larger than the opening dimension of the arrangement hole 325.

Further, in the vicinity of the arrangement hole 325 in the holding member 302, the vibrated member 303 has the same shape as the vibrated member 303 and is formed in a regular hexagonal shape in a plan view, and it is visually recognized that the vibrated member 303 is vibrating. An auxiliary visual recognition portion 326 is formed to facilitate the process. The auxiliary visual recognition portion 326 is a portion integrally formed with the holding member 302, and is provided at a plurality of positions of the holding member 302, particularly around the arrangement hole 325. It should be noted that not all the auxiliary visual recognition portions 326 need to have the same shape as the vibrated member 303, and the auxiliary visual recognition portion 326 formed at the corner of the holding member 302 has a shape in which a part thereof is cut out, that is, one. The portion has the same shape as a part of the vibrated member 303 (a shape in which a part of a regular hexagon is cut out).

Further, in this embodiment, the stick controller 122 can be vibrated by driving the vibrator motor 126 provided in the stick controller 122, and the push button 120 integrally configured with the stick controller 122. Can also be vibrated, whereby the vibrated member 303 can also be vibrated. When the push button 120 is vibrating, the vibrated member 303 vibrates with a large amplitude, but the auxiliary visual recognition unit 326 integrated with the holding member 302 vibrates with a smaller amplitude than the vibrated member 303. The vibration of the vibrated member 303 is emphasized and visually recognized due to the difference in (amplitude).

In FIGS. 2 and 3, the vibrated member 303 is shown as halftone dots to aid understanding, but the color of the vibrated member 303 and the color of the auxiliary visual recognition unit 326 are the same. .. That is, when the vibrated member 303 is not vibrating, it is difficult to distinguish between the vibrated member 303 and the auxiliary visual recognition unit 326, and it is difficult to know which part vibrates. .. Therefore, when the vibrated member 303 starts to vibrate, unexpectedness occurs and the game entertainment is improved.

Further, below the vibrated member 303, a vibrating lens member 304 for transmitting vibration to each vibrated member 303 is provided. In this embodiment, one plate-shaped vibrating lens member 304 is provided, and the vibration applied to the vibrating lens member 304 is transmitted to each vibrated member 303. The inside of the vibrated member 303 has a hollow shape, and a swing shaft projecting downward is provided at the center thereof. On the upper surface side of the vibrating lens member 304, a plurality of bottomed hole portions 335 in which the lower ends of the vibrating shafts of the vibrated member 303 are arranged are provided. Further, the vibrated member 303 is provided so as to be swingable around the lower end of the swing shaft.

Further, among the plurality of bottomed hole portions 335 formed in the vibrating lens member 304, some of the bottomed hole portions 335 are formed in the convex portion 336 projecting upward from the vibrating lens member 304. , Each convex portion 336 is formed so that the protruding length is different. That is, when the height position of the bottom surface of each bottomed hole 335 is different and the vibrated member 303 is swung around the lower end of the swinging shaft that contacts the bottom surface of the bottomed hole 335. In addition, there is a difference in the vibration mode of each vibrated member 303 (swinging at random). In this embodiment, in the vibrating lens member 304, the height position of the bottomed hole portion 335 provided on the central portion side of the push button 120 is high, and the bottomed hole portion 335 provided on the peripheral side of the push button 120 is high. The height position of is low. The height position of each vibrated member 303 is different according to the difference in the height position of the bottomed hole portion 335.

As shown in FIG. 2, a plate-shaped button base member 305 is provided below the vibrating lens member 304. The holding member 302 holding the vibrated member 303 is connected to the button base member 305 with the vibrating lens member 304 housed inside. The vibrating lens member 304 is placed on the upper surface side of the button base member 305, and the vibrating lens member 304 is oscillated with respect to the button base member 305. Further, on the peripheral edge of the button base member 305, an engaged portion 343 to which the engaging convex portion 327 provided on the peripheral edge of the holding member 302 is engaged is provided. Further, the transparent cover 301 is connected to the button base member 305 from above. On the peripheral edge of the button base member 305, an engaging convex portion 345 that is engaged with the engaged concave portion 323 provided on the peripheral edge of the transparent cover 301 is provided.

In this embodiment, the holding member 302, the vibrated member 303, the vibrating lens member 304, and the button base member 305 are made of a translucent material, and as will be described later, an effect button that is irradiated from below. The light of the LED 360 can be transmitted. The vibrating member 303, the vibrating lens member 304, and the button base member 305 do not have to be completely transparent, and may be an opaque member such as frosted glass as long as they have at least translucency. It may be a colored member.

Although the transparent cover 301 described above is configured as a completely transparent member, the present invention is not limited to this, and the degree of transparency is such that the vibration mode of the vibrated member 303 can be visually recognized (recognized). The transparent cover 301 may be an opaque member such as frosted glass, or may be a colored member.

As shown in FIG. 3, a plate-shaped base member 306 is provided below the button base member 305. A coil spring 355 is provided at the center of the base member 306 as a urging means for urging the button base member 305 to one side (upward). One end of the coil spring 355 is arranged in a spring arrangement portion 354 formed in the central portion of the upper surface of the base member 306, and the other end of the coil spring 355 is a spring formed in the central portion of the lower surface of the button base member 305. It is mounted on the mounting protrusion. The coil spring 355 has an urging force in the extending direction, and the coil spring 355 imparts an urging force to the button base member 305 so as to be moved upward.

Further, in the vicinity of the peripheral edge on the lower surface side of the button base member 305, an engaging claw 344 inserted into the mounting hole 353 of the base member 306 is projected downward. By loosely fitting the engaging claw 344 into the mounting hole 353, the button base member 305 is mounted on the base member 306 in a state where the button base member 305 can move in the vertical direction with respect to the base member 306. Further, the lower end portion of the engaging claw 344 has a hook shape so that the engaging claw 344 does not come out upward from the mounting hole 353. That is, even if the button base member 305 rises due to the urging force of the coil spring 355, the moving range is regulated by the engaging claw 344.

Further, the outer peripheral edge of the transparent cover 301 is provided with a ridge 321 that protrudes in the horizontal direction and is formed so as to surround the outer peripheral edge. Further, a convex piece 322 is provided at the front end portion of the transparent cover 301. The convex strip 321 of the transparent cover 301 is hooked on the hooked strip provided on the inner peripheral edge of the button arranging portion 308, and the convex piece 322 of the transparent cover 301 is provided on the front end portion of the button arranging portion 308. By being hooked on the hooked portion, even if the button base member 305 rises, its movement range is restricted.

In this embodiment, when the player presses the push button 120, the transparent cover 301, the holding member 302, the vibrated member 303, the vibrating lens member 304, and the button base member 305 are integrated into a coil spring. It is moved downward against the 355 urging force. In this embodiment, the transparent cover 301, the holding member 302, the vibrated member 303, the vibrating lens member 304, and the button base member 305 form a moving portion that is movably supported by the base member 306.

Further, the push button 120 is arranged in the empty arrangement space 370 of the button arrangement portion 308. A screw fixing hole 312 through which a screw for fixing the base member 306 is inserted is provided in the upper part of the operation stick 309 (the base portion of the button arrangement portion 308). The screw fixing holes 312 are provided at two locations on the left and right. Further, female screw portions 356 are provided at two positions on the left and right near one end of the base member 306 (in this embodiment, near the front end). The base member 306 is fixed to the operating rod 309 by screwing the screw inserted into the screw fixing hole 312 into the female screw portion 356. Then, when the vibrator motor 126 is driven and the operation stick 309 is vibrated, the vibration is transmitted to the base member 306 via the screw inserted into the screw fixing hole 312, and is provided above the base member 306. The push button 120 (moving part) vibrates.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, a button substrate 307 is provided below the base member 306. A button LED 360 for directing is mounted on the button substrate 307. A plurality of the button LEDs 360 are provided on the button substrate 307 (seven in this embodiment), and the base member 306 has a window portion 351 in which the button LEDs 360 are arranged at positions corresponding to the button LEDs 360. It is open. Then, when the button LED 360 is turned on, light is incident from the lower surface of the button base member 305, and the light refracted and diffused by the light diffusing portion of the vibrating lens member 304 is transferred to the holding member 302 and the vibrated member 303. It is incident from below. Therefore, when the push button 120 is viewed from the player's point of view, the holding member 302 and the vibrated member 303 appear to be emitting light.

Further, the button substrate 307 is equipped with a push sensor 361 (photo sensor) for detecting whether or not a pressing operation performed on the push button 120 has been performed. Further, the base member 306 is opened with a window portion 352 in which the push sensor 361 is arranged at a position corresponding to the push sensor 361. The push sensor 361 is exposed on the upper surface side of the base member 306 via the window portion 352.

FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration on the main board (game control board) 31. Note that FIG. 4 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to a game control means) 560 that controls the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a program for game control (game progress control), a RAM 55 as a storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built into the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer may have at least a CPU 56 and a RAM 55 built-in, and the ROM 54 may be externally attached or built-in. Further, the I / O port portion 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 also has a built-in random number circuit 503 that generates a hardware random number (a random number generated by the hardware circuit).

Further, the RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means in which a part or all thereof is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the game machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 are stored for a predetermined backup period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot supply power). To. In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, etc.) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of the power failure or the like based on the data when the data is restored after the power failure or the like occurs. Further, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up by the power supply.

Since the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 executes control according to the program stored in the ROM 54, the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) will execute (or process) the following. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. This also applies to microcomputers mounted on a substrate other than the main substrate 31.

The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination for determining whether or not to make a big hit based on the display result of the variable display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 503 updates the numerical data according to the set update rule within the numerical range in which the initial value (for example, 0) and the upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and the start is generated at a random timing. It has a random number generation function in which the read numerical data becomes a random number value based on the time when the winning is the time of reading (extracting) the numerical data.

Further, an input driver circuit 58 that gives detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. The main board also includes an output circuit 59 that drives a solenoid 16 that opens and closes the variable winning ball device 15 and a solenoid 21 that opens and closes the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a large winning opening according to a command from the game control microcomputer 560. It is mounted on 31.

Further, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a for variably displaying a special symbol, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10 for variably displaying a normal symbol, and a first special symbol hold memory. The display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol holding storage display 18b, and the normal symbol holding storage display 41 is performed.

An information output circuit 64 that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer via the terminal board 160 is also mounted on the main board 31.

In this embodiment, the effect control means (consisting of the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect content from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. It receives the effect control command and controls the display of the effect display device 9 that variably displays the effect symbol.

Further, the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 is the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side, the accessory LED 202 provided on the effect accessory 201, and the push button via the lamp driver substrate 35. In addition to controlling the display of the button LED 360 provided on the 120, the sound output from the speaker 27 is controlled via the voice output board 70.

As will be described later, the effect control means is also connected to the trigger sensor 125 included in the stick controller 122, the tilt direction sensor unit 123, the vibrator motor 126, and the push sensor 361 included in the push button 120. However (see FIG. 5), the illustration is omitted in FIG.

FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 5, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but a microcomputer may be mounted. Further, it is possible to provide only the effect control board 80 for effect control without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70.

The effect control board 80 is equipped with an effect control CPU 101 and an effect control microcomputer 100 including a RAM for storing information related to the effect such as an effect symbol process flag. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the effect control microcomputer 100 is not backed up. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates according to a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and a capture signal (capture signal) from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 (not shown). The effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103 in response to the effect control INT signal). Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to control the display of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

In this embodiment, the VDP 109 that controls the display of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 100, and VRAM is mapped there. VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

The effect control CPU 101 outputs a command for reading necessary data from the CGROM (not shown) to the VDP 109 according to the received effect control command. The CGROM stores in advance character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, people, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including effect patterns), and background image data. ROM for. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CG ROM in response to a command from the effect control CPU 101. Then, the VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulatory means.

As a signal direction regulating means, the relay board 77 allows the signal input from the main board 31 to pass only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal does not pass in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 of the above is mounted. As a unidirectional circuit, for example, a diode or a transistor is used. FIG. 5 illustrates a diode. Further, a unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Further, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 which is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is regulated. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (on the side of the game control microcomputer 560). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port portion 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit which is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided on the outside of the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the trigger button 121 of the stick controller 122 has been detected from the trigger sensor 125 via the input port 106. Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the push button 120 has been detected from the push sensor 361 via the input port 106. Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the operation stick of the stick controller 122 has been detected from the tilt direction sensor unit 123 via the input port 106. .. Further, the effect control CPU 101 vibrates the stick controller 122 by outputting a drive signal to the vibrator motor 126 via the output port 105.

Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

In the lamp driver board 35, the signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies a current to a light emitter such as the frame LED 28, the accessory LED 202, and the button LED 360 based on the signal for driving the LED.

In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesis IC 703 generates voices and sound effects according to the sound number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplifier circuit 705 outputs a voice signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the voice synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data according to the sound number data. The control data according to the sound number data is a collection of data showing the output mode of the sound effect or the sound in a predetermined effect period (for example, the variation period of the effect symbol) in chronological order.

Next, the operation of the game machine will be described. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When the power is turned on to the game machine and the power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, CPU 56) After executing the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first makes necessary initial settings.

In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and the stack pointer designated address is set in the stack pointer (step S3). Then, after initializing the built-in device (initializing the built-in device (built-in peripheral circuit) CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), etc.) (step S4), the RAM can be accessed. Is set to (step S5). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output by the built-in device is This mode indicates the interrupt address.

Next, the CPU 56 confirms the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (step S6). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes a normal initialization process (steps S10 to S15).

If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing in the backup RAM area (for example, processing when power supply is stopped such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the game machine was stopped. (Step S7). After confirming that such protection processing has not been performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed by, for example, the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop processing.

After confirming that the power supply stop processing has been performed, the CPU 56 checks the data in the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and saved by the same processing in the power supply stop processing. If the data is restored after the power supply is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, the initialization process executed when the power is turned on, which is not the time when the power supply is stopped, is executed.

If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 performs game state recovery processing (steps S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Processing) is performed. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set in the pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. By the processing of steps S41 and S42, the saved contents remain as they are for the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, the data indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.), and the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer). ), The part where the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). Further, the CPU 56 transmits a display result designation command specifying a display result (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot, sudden probability variation jackpot, small hit, or loss) stored in the backup RAM to the effect control board 80 (step). S44). Then, the process proceeds to step S14. In step S44, for example, when the value of the special symbol pointer described later is also stored in the backup RAM, the CPU 56 also transmits the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command (see FIG. 10). You may try to do it. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 may restart the variation display of the fourth symbol based on the reception of the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command.

In this embodiment, the value of the variable time timer, which will be described later, is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, after the display result designation command is transmitted in step S44, the measurement of the value of the saved fluctuation time timer is restarted, the fluctuation display of the special symbol is restarted, and the data is saved. When the value of the fluctuation time timer that has been set timed out, the symbol confirmation specification command described later is transmitted. Further, in this embodiment, the value of the special symbol process flag described later is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, the special symbol process processing is restarted from the process corresponding to the value of the saved special symbol process flag.

The CPU 56 may first check whether or not the value of the variable time timer stored in the backup RAM area is 0, instead of always transmitting the display result specification command when the power failure is restored. .. Then, if the value of the fluctuation time timer is not 0, it is determined that a power failure occurs during the fluctuation, and a display result specification command is transmitted. If the fluctuation time timer is 0, the fluctuation time occurs during the power failure. It may be determined that the state is not present and the display result specification command may not be sent.

Further, the CPU 56 may first check whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag stored in the backup RAM area is 3. Then, if the value of the special symbol process flag is 3, it is determined that a power failure occurs during the fluctuation, and a display result specification command is transmitted. If the special symbol process flag is not 3, the fluctuation occurs during a power failure. It may be determined that it was not inside and the display result specification command may not be sent.

In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the backup RAM area is stored by using both the backup flag and the check data, but only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity to execute the game state recovery process.

In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). By the RAM clear processing, predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) is initialized to 0, but is an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. It may be initialized to. Further, the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization table stored in the ROM 54 is set in the pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, a random number counter for determining a normal symbol hit, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, and other flags for selectively processing according to the control state are initially set. The value is set.

Further, the CPU 56 is an initialization designation command (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed the initialization process) for initializing the sub-board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted). Is also transmitted to the sub-board (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 performs a screen display for notifying that the control of the game machine has been initialized, that is, an initialization notification.

Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 503 (step S14). The CPU 56 sets the random number circuit 503 to update the value of the random number R, for example, by executing the process according to the random number circuit setting program.

Then, in step S15, the CPU 56 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied at predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, as an initial value, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that the timer is interrupted periodically every 4 ms.

When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt prohibition state is set (step S16), and when the execution of the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process is completed, the interrupt enable state is set. Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether or not to reach when it is not a big hit, and it is displayed. The random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating a random number for display. Further, the initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is the initial value of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit the normal symbol (normal symbol hit determination random number generation counter). It is a random number to determine. Game control processing that controls the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls the game devices such as the effect display device, the variable winning ball device, and the ball payout device provided in the game machine. In the process of performing, or the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, also called the game device control process), the count value of the random number for determining the normal symbol hit is one round (taking the random number for determining the normal symbol hit). The initial value is set in the counter when the step is taken by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible value.

When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process in steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. 7. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power failure detection process for detecting whether or not a power failure signal has been output (whether or not it has been turned on) is executed (step S20). The power off signal is output when, for example, the power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supply supplied to the game machine. Then, in the power supply cutoff detection process, when the CPU 56 detects that the power supply cutoff signal is output, it executes a power supply stop time process for storing necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, the detection signals of the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input via the input driver circuit 58, and their states are determined (switch processing: step S21). ).

Next, the CPU 56 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, and a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the hold storage display 41 is executed (step S22). Regarding the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, a drive signal is output to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S32 and S33. Take control.

In addition, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a normal symbol hit determination random number used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S24 and S25).

Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol process process (step S26). In the special symbol process process, the corresponding process is executed according to the special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the grand prize opening in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the game state.

Next, the normal symbol process process is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process process, the CPU 56 executes the corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the game state.

Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S28).

Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to the hall management computer (step S29).

Further, the CPU 56 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 (step S30). Specifically, the payout control micro mounted on the payout control board 37 responds to the winning detection based on any of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 being turned on. A payout control command (a prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in response to a payout control command indicating the number of prize balls.

In this embodiment, for example, a game ball wins a prize in the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, and the detection signals from the first starting opening switch 13a and the second starting opening switch 14a are input. In that case, three prize balls shall be paid out. Further, for example, when a game ball wins a prize in the large prize opening and a detection signal from the count switch 23 is input, 15 prize balls are paid out.

In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 relates to turning on / off the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (step S31: output processing).

Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol display control process for setting the special symbol display control data for displaying the effect of the special symbol according to the value of the special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data ( Step S32).

Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting the normal symbol display control data for displaying the effect of the normal symbol according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data (the normal symbol display control process). Step S33). For example, when the start flag related to the fluctuation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 56 switches the display state (“○” and “×”) of the fluctuation speed of the normal symbol every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. At such a speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating "○" and 0 indicating "x") is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 executes the effect display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting the drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

After that, the interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the process ends.

With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the process of steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. Further, in this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process, but in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is the main process. It may be executed in.

FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1 (MR1): Determine the type of jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot, sudden probability variation jackpot, which will be described later) (for determining the jackpot type).
(2) Random 2 (MR2): Determine the type (type) of the fluctuation pattern (for determining the fluctuation pattern type)
(3) Random 3 (MR3): Determine the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) (for determining the fluctuation pattern)
(4) Random 4 (MR4): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination).
(5) Random 5 (MR5): Determine the initial value of random 4 (for determining the initial value of random 4)

In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 7, the game control microcomputer 560 is a counter for generating the big hit type determination random number (1) and the normal symbol hit determination random number (4). Count up (add 1). That is, they are random numbers for determination, and random numbers other than these are random numbers for display (random 2, random 3) or random numbers for initial value (random 5). In addition, random numbers other than the above random numbers may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Further, in this embodiment, as the big hit determination random number, a random number generated by the hardware built in the game control microcomputer 560 (may be external hardware of the game control microcomputer 560) is used. As the big hit determination random number, a software random number may be used instead of the hardware random number.

FIG. 9A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal jackpot determination table used in a normal state and a time saving state (that is, a gaming state that is not a probability variation state) and a probability variation jackpot determination table used in the probability variation state. Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 9 (A) is set in the normal jackpot determination table, and each numerical value described in the right column of FIG. 9 (A) is set in the probability variation jackpot determination table. Is set. The numerical value shown in FIG. 9A is the jackpot determination value.

9 (B) and 9 (C) are explanatory views showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54, and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The small hit determination table includes a small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when displaying the variation of the first special symbol and a small hit determination table used when displaying the variation of the second special symbol. (For the second special design) Each numerical value shown in FIG. 9 (B) is set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), and in FIG. 9 (C) in the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol). Each of the listed values is set. Further, the numerical values shown in FIGS. 9 (B) and 9 (C) are small hit determination values.

The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random R). The big hit determination random number value is shown in FIG. 9A. If any of the jackpot determination values is matched, it is decided to make a jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot, sudden probability variation jackpot, which will be described later) for the special symbol. Further, when the random value for big hit determination matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 9 (B) and 9 (C), it is determined to make a small hit with respect to the special symbol. The "probability" shown in FIG. 9A indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, the "probability" shown in FIGS. 9 (B) and 9 (C) indicates the probability (ratio) of a small hit. Further, determining whether or not to make a jackpot means determining whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the small hit game state, but stop at the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9B and 9C, when the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) is used, the small hit is determined at a rate of 1/300. On the other hand, when the small hit determination table (second special symbol) is used, the case where the small hit is determined at a rate of 1/3000 will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first start winning opening 13 is entered and the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the second starting winning opening 14 is entered and the second special symbol is displayed. Compared to the case where the variable display is executed, the rate of being determined as "small hit" is high.

9 (D) and 9 (E) are explanatory views showing the jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b stored in the ROM 54. Of these, FIG. 9 (D) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening 13 (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a of the case. Further, FIG. 9 (E) shows a case where the jackpot type is determined by using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening 14 (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). It is a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b.

The jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b set the jackpot type to "normal jackpot" or "normal jackpot" based on a random number (random 1) for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. It is a table referred to for determining either "probability change jackpot" or "sudden change jackpot". In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9D and 9E, the jackpot type determination table 131a is assigned five determination values for the “sudden probability variation jackpot” (40 minutes). In contrast to the jackpot type judgment table 131b, one judgment value is assigned to the "sudden probability change jackpot" (1/40 percentage). (Suddenly determined to be a probabilistic jackpot). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first start winning opening 13 is entered and the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the second starting winning opening 14 is entered and the second special symbol is displayed. Compared to the case where the fluctuation display is executed, the rate of being determined as "sudden probability change jackpot" is high. It should be noted that the "sudden probability change jackpot" is distributed only to the jackpot type determination table 131a for the first special symbol, and the "sudden probability variation jackpot" is not distributed to the jackpot type determination table 131b for the second special symbol (that is, , "Sudden probability change jackpot" may be determined only when the variation display of the first special symbol is performed).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9D and 9E, there are "normal jackpot", "probability change jackpot", and "sudden probability variation jackpot" as jackpot types. In this embodiment, the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is shown in two types, 15 rounds and 2 rounds, but the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is shown in this embodiment. It is not limited to the ones. For example, a 10R probability variable jackpot controlled for a 10-round jackpot game, a 7R probability variable jackpot controlled for a 7-round jackpot game, and a 5R probability variable jackpot controlled for a 5-round jackpot game may be provided. Further, in this embodiment, the case where the big hit types are three types of "normal big hit", "probability change big hit" and "sudden change big hit" is shown, but the case is not limited to three types, for example, four or more types. A jackpot type may be provided. On the contrary, the number of jackpot types may be less than three, and for example, only two types may be provided as jackpot types.

The "normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 15 rounds and shifts to only a time saving state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (see step S167 described later). Then, after shifting to the time saving state, when the variation display is completed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), the time saving state ends (see steps S168 and S137 to S140). Even before the end of the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times, the time saving state is ended even when the next big hit occurs (see step S132).

The "probability change jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the jackpot game state of 15 rounds and shifts to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state (in this embodiment, it shifts to the probability change state and also in the time saving state. Migrate. See steps S169 and S170 described later). Then, the probabilistic state and the time saving state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S132).

Further, the "sudden change jackpot" is allowed up to the number of times that the big winning opening is opened less than the "normal jackpot" and the "probability change jackpot" (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice). It is a big hit to be done. That is, in the case of "sudden probability change big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state of two rounds. In addition, in "normal jackpot" and "probability jackpot", the opening time of the jackpot per round is as long as 29 seconds, while in "sudden jackpot", the opening time of the jackpot per round is long. It is extremely short at 0.1 seconds, and it can hardly be expected that a game ball will win a prize at the big prize opening during a big hit game. Then, in this embodiment, after the sudden end of the probabilistic jackpot gaming state, the probabilistic state is shifted (in this embodiment, the probabilistic state is shifted and the time is shortened as well. Step S169, which will be described later, See S170). Then, the probabilistic state and the time saving state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S132).

The mode of the sudden change jackpot is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, the number of times the big winning opening is opened may be 15 times (15 rounds), which is the same as a normal big hit or a sudden change big hit, and only the opening time of the big winning opening may be extremely short, 0.1 seconds.

In this embodiment, even when a "small hit" occurs, the big winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds each, and the same control as in the big hit game state by the "sudden probability change big hit" is performed. Will be. Then, in the case of a "small hit", the gaming state does not change after the two opening of the large winning opening is completed, and the gaming state before the "small hit" is maintained. By doing so, it becomes impossible to recognize whether it is a "sudden change big hit" or a "small hit", and the interest of the game is improved. If all the big hit types are configured to be probabilistic big hits, it is not necessary to provide small hits. In addition, when a small hit is provided when all the jackpot types are probability variable jackpots, the sudden probability variable jackpot is only shifted to the probability variation state (high probability state) and is not accompanied by the time saving state (high base state). It is preferable to provide the above (the opening pattern of the big winning opening is also the same for the sudden change big hit and the small hit).

The jackpot type judgment tables 131a and 131b are numerical values to be compared with the value of random 1, and are judgment values corresponding to each of "normal jackpot", "probability variation jackpot", and "sudden probability variation jackpot" (big hit type judgment value). ) Is set. When the value of random 1 matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type to the type corresponding to the matched jackpot type determination value.

10 and 11 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the examples shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) that specifies a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. ) (Each corresponds to the fluctuation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the fluctuation patterns that can be used, there is a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to each of the fluctuation patterns specified by the number. In addition, "(H)" indicates that it is a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start. Therefore, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the command 80XX (H), the effect display device 9 controls to start the variable display of the effect symbol.

The commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit, whether or not to make a small hit, and the type of big hit. Since the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the display result of the effect symbol in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H), the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are referred to as display result designation commands.

The command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. The command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specification command (or symbol variation designation command). The variation pattern command may include information indicating whether to start the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol.

The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (variation) of the fourth symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variable display (variation) of the fourth symbol and derives and displays the display result.

The command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when the power supply to the game machine is started. The command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when the power supply to the game machine is restarted. When the power supply to the game machine is started, the game control microcomputer 560 sends a power failure recovery designation command if the data is stored in the backup RAM, and initializes the game control otherwise. Send a command.

The command 9F00 (H) is a production control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

The commands A001 and A002 (H) are effect control commands (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command) for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, designating the start of the jackpot game. In this embodiment, a jackpot start designation command or a small hit / sudden probability change jackpot start designation command is used depending on the type of jackpot. Specifically, the big hit start designation command (A001 (H)) is used in the case of "normal big hit" or "probability big hit", and the small hit in the case of "sudden change big hit" or "small hit". / Sudden change big hit start designation command (A002 (H)) is used. Although the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a fanfare designation command for suddenly probabilistic jackpot start designation when it is a sudden jackpot, it may be configured not to send a fanfare designation command when it is a small hit. Good.

The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (command for designating the opening of the winning opening) indicating the display during the opening of the winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. Further, A2XX (H) is an effect control command (a command designated after opening the large winning opening) indicating the closing of the large winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

The command A301 (H) is an effect control command (big hit end designation command: ending 1 designation command) for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, designating the end of the jackpot game. The jackpot end designation command (A301 (H)) is used when ending the jackpot game by "normal jackpot" or "probability variation jackpot". The command A302 (H) is an effect control command (small hit / sudden probability change big hit end designation command: ending 2 designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game or the end of the sudden probability change big hit game. The game control microcomputer 560 is configured to send an ending designation command for suddenly probabilistic jackpot end designation when it is a sudden probability change jackpot, but not to send an ending designation command when it is a small hit. May be good.

The command A400 (H) is an effect control command (a command for designating a prize in the prize opening) for designating that the winning of the game ball has been detected in the prize opening.

The command B000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the normal state. The command B001 (H) is an effect control command (probability change state background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the probability change state. The command B002 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state background designation command) for designating the background display when the gaming state is the time saving state.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first hold storage number addition designation command) that specifies that the first hold storage number has increased by 1. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second hold storage number addition designation command) for designating that the second hold storage number has been increased by 1. The command C200 (H) is an effect control command (first hold storage number subtraction designation command) for designating that the first hold storage number has decreased by 1. The command C300 (H) is an effect control command (second hold storage number subtraction designation command) for designating that the second hold storage number has decreased by 1.

In this embodiment, as the hold information that can specify the hold storage number, the first hold storage number addition designation command, the second hold storage number addition designation command, the first hold storage number subtraction designation command, and the second hold The case where the memory number subtraction specification command is transmitted is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, as the hold information, an effect control command (first hold memory number specification command) that specifies the first hold memory number itself, and an effect control command (second hold memory number specification command) that specifies the second hold memory number itself. May be configured to send. Further, for example, as the hold information, an effect control command (total hold memory number specification command) for designating the total number (total hold memory number) which is the total of the first hold memory number and the second hold memory number is transmitted. It may be configured as. In this case, when the total pending memory number designation information is configured to be transmitted, for example, an effect control command (first start prize designation command) for designating that the first start prize has been given, or a second start win prize. By sending an effect control command (second start winning prize designation command) that specifies that there was, it is possible to specify which of the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number has increased. Good.

The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-mentioned effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the effect display device 9 is changed, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70 according to the contents shown in FIGS. 10 and 11. To do.

12 and 13 are flowcharts showing an example of a program of special symbol process processing (step S26) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the special symbol process process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the large winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process processing, the CPU 56 starts the first start winning opening 13 if the first starting opening switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won is turned on, that is, the first starting winning opening 13. If a prize has been won, the first start port switch passage process is executed (steps S311 and S312). Further, if the second start opening switch 14a for detecting that the game ball has won the second start winning opening 14 is turned on, the CPU 56 has generated a start winning to the second start winning opening 14. Then, the second start port switch passing process is executed (steps S313 and S314). Then, any of the processes of steps S300 to S310 is performed. If the first start winning opening switch 13a or the second starting opening switch 14a is not turned on, any of steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

The processes of steps S300 to S310 are as follows.

Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 0. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms the number of stored numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer (total number of hold storage). The number of numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total hold storage counter. Further, if the count value of the total reserved memory counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. If you want to make a big hit, set the big hit flag. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S301 (1 in this example). The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) is defined as the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol. Decide to do. In addition, control is performed to transmit a fluctuation pattern command according to the determined fluctuation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100, and a fluctuation time timer for measuring the fluctuation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S302 (2 in this example).

Display result specification command transmission process (step S302): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control is performed to send a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S303 (3 in this example).

Special symbol changing process (step S303): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern setting process elapses (the fluctuation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the value of the fluctuation time timer becomes 0), the symbol is confirmed on the effect control microcomputer 100. Controls the transmission of the specified command, and updates the internal state (special symbol process flag) to the value corresponding to step S304 (4 in this example). The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the fourth symbol when it receives the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560.

Special symbol stop processing (step S304): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the jackpot flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S305 (5 in this example). If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S308 (8 in this example). If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example). In this embodiment, based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is 4, as will be described later, special symbol display control for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data (see FIG. 23), and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting content of the output buffer in the display control process in step S22.

Pre-processing for opening the large winning opening (step S305): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-processing for opening the large winning opening, control is performed to open the large winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the large winning opening. In addition, while controlling the transmission of the large winning opening opening designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the execution time of the large winning opening opening processing is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set in step S306. Update to the value corresponding to (6 in this example). The large winning opening pre-opening process is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the large winning opening pre-opening process is also a process for starting the big hit game. Further, since the value for designating the round is set in the EXT data and transmitted for the command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening, a different command for specifying the opening for the large winning opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the jackpot game, a command (A101 (H)) for specifying round 1 is transmitted and the tenth round during the jackpot game is executed. Is transmitted with a command (A10A (H)) during which the large winning opening is open to specify round 10.

Processing during opening of the large winning opening (step S306): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. In the process of opening the large winning opening, processing for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the large winning opening is performed. If the closing condition of the big winning opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S305 (5 in this example). In addition, control is performed to send a designated command to the effect control microcomputer 100 after the jackpot is opened, and when all rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value corresponding to step S307 (this). In the example, update to 7).

Jackpot end processing (step S307): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed so that the effect control microcomputer 100 performs display control for notifying the player that the jackpot game state has ended. In addition, a process of setting a flag indicating the game state (for example, a probability change flag or a time saving flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example).

Small hit release preprocessing (step S308): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the small hit opening pre-processing, control is performed to open the large winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the large winning opening. Further, the execution time of the process during the opening of the large winning opening is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S309 (9 in this example). The small hit opening pre-processing is executed every time the large winning opening is opened during the small hit game, but when the first opening during the small hit game is started, the small hit opening pre-processing is performed by the small hit game. It is also the process to start.

Small hit opening process (step S309): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. Performs processing to confirm the establishment of the closing conditions for the grand prize opening. If the closing condition of the big winning opening is satisfied and the number of times the big winning opening is opened still remains, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to the value corresponding to step S308 (8 in this example). Update. When all the releases are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S310 (10 in this example).

Small hit end process (step S310): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed so that the effect control microcomputer 100 performs display control for notifying the player that the small hit game state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example).

FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process in steps S312 and S314. Of these, FIG. 14A is a flowchart showing the process of passing the first start port switch in step S312. Further, FIG. 14B is a flowchart showing the process of passing the second start port switch in step S314.

First, the process of passing the first start port switch will be described with reference to FIG. 14 (A). In the first start port switch passing process executed when the first start port switch 13a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the first (Whether or not the value of the first hold storage number counter for counting the number of hold storage numbers is 4) is confirmed (step S1211A). If the number of first reserved storage reaches the upper limit, the process ends as it is.

If the first hold storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first hold storage number counter by 1 (step S1212A), and at the same time, the value of the total hold storage number counter for counting the total hold storage number. Is increased by 1 (step S1213A).

Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in the storage area in the first hold storage buffer (see FIG. 15) (step S1214A). .. In the process of step S1214A, a random R (random number for jackpot determination) which is a hardware random number, a random number for jackpot type determination (random 1) which is a software random number, a random number for determining a variation pattern type (random 2), and a variation pattern The judgment random number (random number 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. It should be noted that the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (random 3) is not extracted in the first start port switch passing process (at the time of starting winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. You may do so. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating the variation pattern determination random number (random number 3) in the variation pattern setting process described later.

FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (holding storage buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to the holding storage. As shown in FIG. 15, in the first hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first hold storage number is secured. Further, in the second hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second hold storage number is secured. In this embodiment, the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer include a random R (random number for jackpot determination) which is a hardware random number, a random number for jackpot type determination (random 1) which is a software random number, and a variation. The pattern type determination random number (random 2) and the variation pattern determination random number (random 3) are stored. The first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

Next, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the first hold storage number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1215A).

Next, the second start port switch passing process will be described with reference to FIG. 14 (B). In the second start port switch passing process executed when the second start port switch 14a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the second hold storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second hold). It is confirmed (whether or not the value of the second reserved storage counter for counting the number of storages is 4) (step S1211B). If the second pending storage number has reached the upper limit, the process ends as it is.

If the second hold storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second hold storage number counter by 1 (step S1212B), and the value of the total hold storage number counter for counting the total hold storage number. Is increased by 1 (step S1213B).

Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in the storage area in the second hold storage buffer (see FIG. 15) (step S1214B). .. In the process of step S1214B, a random R (random number for determining a jackpot) which is a hardware random number, a random number for determining a jackpot type (random 1) which is a software random number, a random number for determining a variation pattern type (random 2), and a variation pattern The judgment random number (random number 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. It should be noted that the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (random 3) is not extracted in the second start port switch passing process (at the time of starting winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol. You may do so. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating the variation pattern determination random number (random number 3) in the variation pattern setting process described later.

Next, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the second hold storage number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1215B).

16 and 17 are flowcharts showing a special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step S51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage counter is checked. If the total number of pending storages is 0, if the customer waiting demo designation command has not yet been transmitted, control is performed to send the customer waiting demo designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S51A), and the process is performed. finish. For example, when the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted in step S51A, the CPU 56 sets the customer waiting demo designation command transmission flag indicating that the customer waiting demo designation command has been transmitted. Then, when the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interrupt is executed after the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted, the customer wait demo designation command is repeatedly waited based on the fact that the sent customer flag is set. You can control not to send the demo specification command. Further, in this case, the customer waiting demo designation command sent flag may be reset when the next variation display of the special symbol is started.

If the total number of reserved storages is not 0, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the second number of reserved storages (step S52). Specifically, the value of the second hold storage counter is confirmed. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 56 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol). The data indicating "second" is set in (step S53). If the second reserved storage number is 0, the CPU 56 sets the data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step S54).

By executing the processes of steps S52 to S54, in this embodiment, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variation display of the first special symbol. Not limited to the embodiment shown in this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed in the order of winning the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14. It may be configured as such.

Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 has each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage buffer. Is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage buffer. It is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

Then, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the count value of the hold storage counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first hold storage counter and sets each storage area in the first hold storage buffer. Shift the content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second hold storage counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second hold storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 sets the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 55. Each stored random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 55. The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number (or each second reserved storage number) is always the first reserved storage number (or the first reserved storage number). The order of the second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 is matched.

Then, the CPU 56 reduces the value of the total pending storage number by 1. That is, the count value of the total pending storage counter is subtracted by 1 (step S58). The CPU 56 stores the value of the total pending storage counter before the count value is subtracted by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

Further, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the background designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 according to the current gaming state (step S60). In this case, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the probability change state background specification command when the probability change flag indicating the probability change state is set. Further, the CPU 56 controls to transmit only the time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is set, and if the probability change flag is not set, the time saving state background designation command is transmitted. Further, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the normal state background specification command if neither the probability change flag nor the time saving flag is set.

Specifically, when the CPU 56 transmits an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the CPU 56 sets the address of the command transmission table (previously set in the ROM for each command) corresponding to the effect control command. Set to the pointer. Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set in the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in the effect control command control process (step S28). In this embodiment, when the special symbol variation is started, the background specification command, the variation pattern command, the display result specification command, the first hold storage number subtraction specification command, or the second hold storage is performed for each timer interrupt. It will be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in the order of the number subtraction designation command. Specifically, when starting the variation of the special symbol, the background specification command is first transmitted, the variation pattern command is transmitted after 4 ms, the display result specification command is transmitted after 4 ms, and then 4 ms later. The first hold storage number subtraction designation command or the second hold storage number subtraction designation command is transmitted. When the special symbol variation is started, the symbol variation specification command (first symbol variation specification command, second symbol variation specification command) is also transmitted, but the symbol variation specification command is the same timer interrupt as the variation pattern command. Is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

In the special symbol normal processing, first, the data indicating "first" indicating that the processing is executed for the first start winning opening 13, that is, the "first" indicating that the processing is executed for the first special symbol. ", Or data indicating" second "indicating that processing is executed for the second start winning opening 14, that is," second "indicating that processing is executed for the second special symbol. The data is set in the special symbol pointer. Then, in the subsequent processing in the special symbol process processing, the processing according to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the processing of steps S300 to S310 can be standardized between the case where the first special symbol is targeted and the case where the second special symbol is targeted.

Next, the CPU 56 reads a random number R (random number for jackpot determination) from the random number buffer area and executes the jackpot determination module. In this case, the CPU 56 is for jackpot determination extracted in step S1214A of the first start port switch passage process and step S1214B of the second start port switch pass process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer. Read the random number and make a big hit judgment. The jackpot judgment module compares a predetermined jackpot judgment value or small hit judgment value (see FIG. 9) with a random number for jackpot judgment, and if they match, executes a process of determining a jackpot or a small hit. It is a program to do. That is, it is a program that executes processing of big hit determination and small hit determination.

In the jackpot determination process, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the probability of becoming a jackpot is higher than when the gaming state is in the non-probability state (normal state or time saving state). Specifically, the number of jackpot determination values is probabilistically changed between the probability variation jackpot determination table (the table in which the numerical value on the right side of FIG. 9A in ROM 54 is set) in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance. A normal time jackpot determination table (a table in which the numerical value on the left side of FIG. 9A in the ROM 54 is set) is provided, which is set to be less than the hour jackpot determination table. Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, and when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the CPU 56 performs a jackpot determination process using the probabilistic jackpot determination table, and the gaming state is normal. When it is in the state, the jackpot determination process is performed using the normal jackpot determination table. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches any of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 9A, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a big hit. If it is decided to make a big hit (step S61), the process proceeds to step S71. It should be noted that deciding whether or not to make a big hit means deciding whether or not to shift to the big hit game state, but deciding whether or not to make the stop symbol on the special symbol display a big hit symbol. But also.

It should be noted that confirmation of whether or not the current gaming state is the probabilistic state is performed depending on whether or not the probabilistic flag is set. The probability change flag is set when the game state is changed to the probability change state, and is reset when the probability change state is finished. Specifically, it is determined to be a "probability change jackpot" or a "sudden change jackpot", and is set in the process of ending the jackpot game. Then, after the big hit game is completed, it is reset when the next big hit occurs.

If the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step S61), the CPU 56 uses the small hit determination table (see FIGS. 9B and 9C). Then, the small hit determination process is performed. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 9 (B) and 9 (C), the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a small hit. In this case, the CPU 56 confirms the data indicated by the special symbol pointer, and when the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is "first", the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 9 (B). ) Is used to determine whether or not to make a small hit. Further, when the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is "second", the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 9C is used to determine whether or not to make a small hit. .. Then, when it is decided to make a small hit (step S62), the CPU 56 sets a small hit flag indicating that it is a small hit (step S63), and proceeds to step S75.

If the value of the random R does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step S62), that is, if it is out of the range, the process proceeds to step S75 as it is.

In step S71, the CPU 56 sets a jackpot flag indicating that it is a jackpot. Then, as the table used to determine the jackpot type to be one of the plurality of types, the jackpot type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected (step S72). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 9D. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 9 (E).

Next, the CPU 56 uses the selected jackpot type determination table to use the type (“normal jackpot”, “probability variation”) corresponding to a value that matches the value of the random number (random 1) for determining the jackpot type stored in the random number buffer area. "Big hit" or "Sudden probability change big hit") is determined as the type of big hit (step S73). In this case, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type extracted in step S1214A of the first start port switch passage process and step S1214B of the second start port switch pass process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer. Read the random number and determine the jackpot type. Further, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 9 (D) and 9 (E), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is compared with the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Therefore, the ratio of sudden change jackpots is high.

Further, the CPU 56 sets the data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 (step S74). For example, when the jackpot type is "normal jackpot", "01" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot", "02" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type. When the jackpot type is "sudden probability change jackpot", "03" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type.

Next, the CPU 56 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol (step S75). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-", which is an outlier symbol, is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot flag is set, any one of the jackpot symbols "1", "3", and "7" is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type. That is, when the jackpot type is determined to be "suddenly probable jackpot", "1" is determined to be the stop symbol of the special symbol, and when it is determined to be "normal jackpot", "3" is determined to be the stop symbol of the special symbol. Then, when the "probability change jackpot" is determined, "7" is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the small hit flag is set, "5", which is the small hit symbol, is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol.

In this embodiment, the case where the jackpot type is first determined and the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type is determined is shown. However, the method of determining the jackpot type and the stop symbol of the special symbol is this. It is not limited to the one shown in the embodiment. For example, if a table in which the stop symbol of the special symbol is associated with the jackpot type is prepared in advance and the stop symbol of the special symbol is first determined based on the random number for determining the jackpot type, the corresponding jackpot is determined based on the determination result. The type may also be determined.

Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S76).

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 first confirms whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S81). When the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 56 selects one of the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables as the table used to determine the variation pattern type to one of a plurality of types (step). S82). Then, the process proceeds to step S90.

If the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S83). When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 selects the small hit variation pattern type determination table as the table used to determine the variation pattern type to one of a plurality of types (step S84). ). Then, the process proceeds to step S90.

If the small hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is set is set (step S85). The time saving flag is set when the game state is changed to the probability change state or the time saving state, and is reset when the time saving state is finished. Specifically, when it is determined to be a "normal jackpot", a time saving flag is set in the process of ending the jackpot game. Further, after the jackpot game is completed, it is reset when the variable display of a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment) is completed. Even before the end of the predetermined number of fluctuation displays, the time saving flag is reset even when the next big hit occurs. Further, when it is determined to be "probability change big hit" or "sudden change big hit", the probability change flag is set and the time saving flag is set in the process of ending the big hit game. Then, when the next big hit occurs, the time saving flag is reset together with the probability change flag.

If the time saving flag is not set (N in step S85), the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (step S86). If the total number of pending storage is less than 3 (N in step S86), the CPU 56 determines the variation pattern type for normal use as a table used to determine the variation pattern type to be one of a plurality of types. Select a table (step S87). Then, the process proceeds to step S90.

When the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (Y in step S86), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern for shortening as a table used to determine the variation pattern type to be one of a plurality of types. The type determination table is selected (step S88). Then, the process proceeds to step S90.

When the time saving flag is set (Y in step S85), that is, when the gaming state is the probabilistic state or the time saving state (in this embodiment, when shifting to the probabilistic state, the time saving state is always set. (Refer to steps S169 and S170), if it is determined to be Y in step S85, it may be controlled only in the probabilistic state or the time saving state), so that the CPU 56 determines the fluctuation pattern type. As a table used to determine one of a plurality of types, a time-saving variation pattern type determination table for loss is selected (step S89). Then, the process proceeds to step S90.

In this embodiment, when the processing of steps S85 to S89 is executed and the game state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the variation pattern type determination table for shortening is lost. Is selected. Further, when the gaming state is a probability change state or a time saving state, the time saving variation pattern type determination table for loss is selected. In this case, in the process of step S90 described later, the fluctuation pattern type including the shortened fluctuation fluctuation pattern may be determined as the fluctuation pattern type, and when the fluctuation pattern type including the shortened fluctuation fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation pattern type is determined. In the process of step S92, the fluctuation pattern of the shortened fluctuation is determined as the fluctuation pattern. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is a probabilistic change state or a time saving state, or when the total number of reserved storages is 3 or more, the variation display of the shortened variation may be performed.

Next, the CPU 56 reads random number 2 (random number for determining the variation pattern type) from the random number buffer area (first hold storage buffer or second hold storage buffer), and selects it in the process of steps S82, S84, S87, S88 or S89. By referring to the table, the variation pattern type is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S90).

Next, the CPU 56 is a table used to determine the fluctuation pattern to one of a plurality of types based on the determination result of the fluctuation pattern type in step S90, such as a hit fluctuation pattern determination table and a loss variation pattern determination table. One of them is selected (step S91). Further, by reading random number 3 (random number for determining variation pattern) from the random number buffer area (first hold storage buffer or second hold storage buffer) and referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in the process of step S91, the variation pattern Is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S92). When the random number 3 (random number for determining the fluctuation pattern) is not extracted at the timing of the start winning, the CPU 56 is a random number counter for determining the fluctuation pattern for generating the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (random number 3). The value may be directly extracted from, and the fluctuation pattern may be determined based on the extracted random number value.

Next, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the symbol variation designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S93). Specifically, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the first symbol variation designation command when the special symbol pointer indicates "first". Further, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the second symbol variation designation command when the special symbol pointer indicates "second". Further, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S94).

Next, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S95). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S302) (step S96).

FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a display result designation command transmission process (step S302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 56 transmits one of the display result 1 designation to display result 5 designation production control commands (see FIG. 10) according to the determined type of big hit, small hit, and loss. Control to do. Specifically, the CPU 56 first confirms whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S120). If it is not set, the process proceeds to step S126. When the jackpot flag is set and the jackpot type is "normal jackpot", control is performed to transmit the display result 2 designation command (steps S121 and S122). It should be noted that whether or not it is a "normal jackpot" can be specifically determined by confirming whether or not the data set in the jackpot type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is "01". .. Further, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the display result 3 designation command when the type of the jackpot is "probability variation jackpot" (steps S123 and S124). It should be noted that whether or not it is a "probability variation jackpot" can be specifically determined by confirming whether or not the data set in the jackpot type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is "02". .. Then, when it is neither "normal jackpot" nor "probability jackpot" (that is, when it is "suddenly probabilistic jackpot"), the CPU 56 controls to transmit the display result 4 designated command (step S125).

On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set (N in step S120), the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S126). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the display result 5 designation command (step S127). When the small hit flag is not set (N in step S126), that is, when it is off, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the display result 1 designation command (step S128).

Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S303) (step S129).

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a special symbol changing process (step S303) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol change processing, the CPU 56 first confirms whether or not the first hold storage number subtraction designation command or the second hold storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted (step S1121). Whether or not the first hold storage number subtraction designation command or the second hold storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted is determined by, for example, in step S1122 described later, the first hold storage number subtraction designation command or the second hold storage number subtraction designation command. When the number subtraction specification command is transmitted, the hold storage number subtraction specification command indicating that the first hold storage number subtraction specification command or the second hold storage number subtraction specification command has been transmitted is set so that the transmitted flag is set, and in step S1121 , The hold storage number subtraction specification command It is sufficient to confirm whether or not the sent flag is set. Further, in this case, the set hold storage number subtraction specification command transmission flag should be reset by the special symbol stop processing or the jackpot end processing described later when the variable display of the special symbol is terminated or the jackpot is terminated. Just do it.

Next, if the first hold storage number subtraction designation command or the second hold storage number subtraction designation command has not been transmitted, the CPU 56 issues the hold storage number subtraction designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100. Is controlled to be transmitted to (step S1122). Specifically, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the first hold storage number subtraction designation command when the special symbol pointer indicates "first". Further, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the second hold storage number subtraction designation command when the special symbol pointer indicates "second".

Next, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation time timer (step S1125), and when the fluctuation time timer times out (step S1126), controls to send a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1127). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S304) (step S1128). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends as it is.

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process (step S304) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S131). When the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 56, if set, has a probability variation flag indicating that it is in a probability variation state, a time reduction flag indicating that it is in a time reduction state, and the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the time reduction state. The time reduction counter indicating the above is reset (step S132), and control is performed to send a jackpot start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S133). Specifically, when the type of jackpot is "normal jackpot" or "probability variation jackpot", the jackpot start designation command (command A001 (H)) is transmitted. If the type of big hit is a sudden probability change big hit, a small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command (command A002 (H)) is transmitted. Whether the jackpot type is "normal jackpot", "probability variation jackpot", or "sudden probability variation jackpot" is data indicating the jackpot type stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the jackpot type buffer). Judgment is based on.

Further, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (time for notifying the occurrence of the jackpot, for example, in the effect display device 9) in the timer before opening the jackpot (step S134). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, 15 times in the case of "normal big hit" or "probability change big hit" and 2 times in the case of "sudden change big hit") is set in the big winning opening opening number counter (step S135). .. In addition, the round time per round in the jackpot game is also set. Specifically, in the case of a sudden big hit, 0.1 seconds is set as the round time, and in the case of a normal big hit or a probable big hit, 29 seconds is set as the round time. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the large winning opening pre-opening process (step S305) (step S136).

If the jackpot flag is not set in step S131, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the time reduction counter indicating the variable number of times of the special symbol in the time reduction state is 0 (step S137). If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the time reduction counter by -1 (step S138). Then, when the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S139), the CPU 56 resets the time reduction flag (step S140).

Next, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S141). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 transmits a small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command (command A002 (H)) to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S142). Further, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the small hit display time (time for notifying the effect display device 9 that a small hit has occurred) in the timer before opening the large winning opening (step S143). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, twice) is set in the large winning opening opening number counter (step S144). In addition, the opening time for each large winning opening in the small hit game is also set. Specifically, 0.1 seconds, which is the same as the round time of the sudden change big hit, is set as the opening time per big winning opening in the small hit game. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit start pre-processing (step S308) (step S145).

If the small hit flag is not set (N in step S141), the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S300) (step S146).

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process process. In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step S160), and if the jackpot end display timer is set, proceeds to step S164. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the jackpot flag is reset (step S161), and control is performed to transmit the jackpot end designation command (step S162). Here, if it is a "normal jackpot" or a "probability change jackpot", a jackpot end specification command (command A301 (H)) is transmitted, and if it is a "sudden probability variation jackpot", a small hit / sudden probability variation jackpot The end specification command (command A302 (H)) is transmitted. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the jackpot end display is being performed in the effect display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the jackpot end display timer (step S163), and the process is terminated.

In step S164, the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step S164). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S165). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S165), the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the jackpot ending this time is a normal jackpot (step S166). It should be noted that whether or not it is a "normal jackpot" can be specifically determined by confirming whether or not the data set in the jackpot type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is "01". .. If it is a normal big hit, the CPU 56 sets the time saving flag and shifts to the time saving state (step S167). Further, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) in the time reduction counter (step S168).

If it is not a normal jackpot (that is, if it is a probability variation jackpot or a sudden probability variation jackpot), the CPU 56 sets the probability variation flag to shift to the probability variation state (step S169), and sets the time saving flag to shift to the time saving state. (Step S170).

Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S300) (step S171).

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the special symbol display control process (step S32) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (step S3201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, if the special symbol change processing is being executed), the CPU 56 sets the special symbol display control data for the special symbol change display for setting the special symbol display control data. A process of setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S3202). In this case, the CPU 56 sets or updates special symbol display control data for variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 every 0.2 seconds. After that, the display control process (see step S22) is executed, and the drive signals are output to the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b is executed.

If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (step S3203). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, when the process shifts to the special symbol stop processing), the CPU 56 stops and displays the stop symbol of the special symbol set in the special symbol normal processing. A process of setting the display control data in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data is performed (step S3204). In this case, the CPU 56 sets special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. After that, the display control process (see step S22) is executed, and the drive signals are output to the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The stop symbol of the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b.

Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) as the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process. In the main process, first, the initialization process for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing the timer for determining the activation interval (for example, 4 ms) of the effect control is performed (step S701). ..

After that, the effect control CPU 101 shifts to the loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S702). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the following effect control process.

In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704).

Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs the effect control process process (step S705). In the effect control process process, the display control of the effect display device 9 is executed by selecting the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) from each process according to the control state.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs the fourth symbol process process (step S706). In the fourth symbol process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (fourth symbol process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state in the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d of the effect display device 9. The display control of the fourth symbol is executed.

Next, a random number update process for updating the count value of the counter for generating a random number such as a random number for determining a jackpot symbol is executed (step S707). After that, the process proceeds to step S702.

FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing an effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. In this example, a ring buffer type command reception buffer capable of storing six 2-byte production control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is composed of a 12-byte area of the reception command buffers 1 to 12. Then, a command reception number counter is used to indicate in which area the received command is stored. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. It does not necessarily have to be in the ring buffer format.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that it reads 2 bytes (1 command) at a time.

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

If the received effect control command is a display result specification command (step S617), the effect control CPU 101 forms the received display result specification command (display result 1 designation command to display result 5 designation command) in the RAM. It is stored in the display result specification command storage area (step S618).

If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S619), the effect control CPU 101 sets the confirmation command reception flag (step S620).

If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (step S621), the effect control CPU 101 sets the jackpot start designation command reception flag (step S622).

If the received effect control command is a small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command (step S623), the effect control CPU 101 sets the small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command reception flag (step S624).

If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (step S625), the effect control CPU 101 sets the jackpot end designation command reception flag (step S626).

If the received effect control command is a small hit / sudden probability change big hit end designation command (step S627), the effect control CPU 101 sets the small hit / sudden probability change big hit end designation command reception flag (step S628).

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S629). Then, the process proceeds to step S611.

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the effect control process process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. 24. In the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 101 performs any of steps S800 to S807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following processes are executed. In the effect control process process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled to realize the variable display of the effect symbol, but the control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the fluctuation of the first special symbol is also the second. Control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the fluctuation of the special symbol is also executed in one effect control process process.

Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the variation pattern command is received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801).

Effect symbol variation start process (step S801): Control is performed so that the effect symbol variation is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802).

Processing during effect symbol change (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each change state (fluctuation speed) constituting the change pattern, and monitors the end of the change time. Then, when the fluctuation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803).

Effect symbol fluctuation stop processing (step S803): Control is performed to stop the variation of the effect symbol and derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

Big hit display process (step S804): After the end of the fluctuation time, the effect display device 9 is controlled to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the processing during the round (step S805).

Processing during the round (step S805): Display control during the round is performed. Then, when the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round is not completed, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the round post-processing (step S806). If the final round is completed, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S807).

Round post-processing (step S806): Display control between rounds is performed. Then, when the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the processing during the round (step S805).

Jackpot end effect processing (step S807): The effect display device 9 performs display control to notify the player that the jackpot game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 27. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S813).

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 27. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 first reads the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S8000). Next, the effect control CPU 101 displays a display result (stop) of the effect symbol according to the variation pattern command read in step S8000 and the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (that is, the received display result specification command). The symbol) is determined (step S8001). When the pseudo-ream is specified by the variation pattern command, in step S8001, the effect control CPU 101 uses a chance pattern symbol (for example, "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo-ream. , A combination of a jackpot symbol that does not reach but one symbol is out of alignment) is also determined. The effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect symbol display result storage area.

FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 30, when the received display result designation command indicates "normal jackpot" (when the received display result designation command is the display result 2 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 is stopped. As the symbols, the combination of the effect symbols in which the three symbols are the same even-numbered symbols is determined. In addition, when the received display result specification command indicates "probability variation jackpot" (when the received display result specification command is the display result 3 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 has 3 symbols as stop symbols. Determine the combination of production symbols with the same odd-numbered symbols.

If the received display result specification command indicates "sudden probability change big hit" or "small hit" (when the received display result specification command is a display result 4 designation command or a display result 5 designation command), The effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of effect symbols such as "135" as the stop symbol. Then, in the case of "off" (when the received display result designation command is the display result 1 designation command), the combination of the effect symbols other than the above is determined. However, if a reach effect is involved, the combination of the left and right two symbols is determined. Further, the combination of the three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 9 is the "stop symbol" of the effect symbol.

The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of effect symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other to generate a stop symbol of the effect symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

As for the production symbols, the stop symbol (a combination of symbols in which the left, middle, and right are all the same symbol) reminiscent of a jackpot is called a jackpot symbol. In addition, a stop symbol that reminds us of an outlier is called an outlier symbol. Further, a symbol that reminds us of a probabilistic state (an odd number symbol in this embodiment) is also called a probabilistic symbol, and a symbol that reminds us that it does not become a probabilistic state (an even number symbol in this embodiment) is a non-probable variation symbol. Also called.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes a specific effect setting process for determining the presence / absence and type of the specific effect execution using the effect accessory 201 (step S8002).

Although the description is omitted in this embodiment, various notice effects (for example, step-up notice effect, character notice effect, button notice effect, character notice effect, group) are performed during the variable display of the effect symbol. Notice production, mini character notice production) may be configured to be executable. In this case, for example, in the effect symbol change start process, if the advance notice effect setting process for determining the presence / absence and type of the advance notice effect is executed and it is decided to execute the advance notice effect, the advance notice is given in step S8003 described later. It may be configured to select the process table according to the production.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table according to the fluctuation pattern (step S8003). Then, the effect control CPU 101 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the process table selected in step S8003 (step S8004).

FIG. 31 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the process table. The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect device (effect component) such as the effect display device 9 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of a collection of a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data and the like indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect symbol. Specifically, data related to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. Further, in the process timer set value, the fluctuation time in the mode of fluctuation is set. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table and controls the display control to display the effect symbol in the variation mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value.

The process table shown in FIG. 31 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. In addition, the process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern.

In the process table used when executing the effect control for the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbol to be stopped and displayed in the process table, the image for displaying the symbol is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the pseudo-ream, and the temporary stop symbol in the sliding effect. You may.

Further, the effect control CPU 101 serves as an effect device (effect display device 9 as an effect component, effect component 9) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 27) as production parts is executed (step S8005). For example, the effect display device 9 outputs a command to the VDP 109 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps. Further, in order to output the sound from the speaker 27, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70.

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 controls the variation pattern command so that the effect pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one, but the effect control CPU 101 controls the variation pattern command. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step S8006).

Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802) (step S8007).

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a specific effect setting process (step S8002) in the effect symbol variation start process. In the specific effect setting process, the effect control CPU 101 first confirms whether or not the variation display started this time is a big hit (step S5001). Whether or not the variable display started this time is a big hit can be determined, for example, by checking the display result specification command stored in the display result specification command storage area. Further, for example, it may be determined by confirming whether or not the fluctuation pattern command read in step S8000 specifies the fluctuation pattern for big hits.

If the variation display started this time is a big hit (Y in step S5001), the effect control CPU 101 selects a specific effect determination table for the big hit as a table for determining the presence / absence and type of the specific effect. (Step S5002). Unless the variation display started this time is a big hit (N in step S5001), the effect control CPU 101 selects a specific effect determination table for removal as a table for determining the presence / absence and type of the specific effect. (Step S5003). Then, the effect control CPU 101 executes a lottery process based on random numbers using the specific effect determination table selected in steps S5002 and S5003, and determines the presence / absence and type of the specific effect (step S5004).

FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the specific effect determination table. Of these, FIG. 33A shows a specific example of the specific effect determination table for the jackpot selected in step S5002. Further, FIG. 33B shows a specific example of the specific effect determination table for deviation selected in step S5003. As shown in FIG. 33, in the specific effect determination table, determination values are assigned to each of the specific effect none, the specific effect A, the specific effect B, and the specific effect C.

In this embodiment, as a specific effect, an effect of lighting and displaying the accessory LED 202 provided on the effect accessory 201 is executed. In this embodiment, there are three types of specific effects A to C in the specific effect. The specific effect A is an effect of causing the accessory LED 202 provided in the effect accessory 201 to emit light with a white lighting color. Further, the specific effect B is an effect of causing the accessory LED 202 provided in the effect accessory 201 to emit light in a red lighting color. Further, the specific effect C is an effect of causing the accessory LED 202 provided in the effect accessory 201 to emit light by changing the lighting color in order to emit light by rainbow color display (rainbow display).

Further, in this embodiment, when the specific effect is executed, the suggestion effect suggesting the specific effect is executed. As the suggestion effect, the effect of vibrating the push button 120 is executed. As shown in FIG. 33, in this embodiment, the vibration time of the push button 120 differs depending on which type of specific effect is executed, and when the specific effect A is executed, the push button 120 is executed. The vibration time of is 1 second. Further, when the specific effect B is executed, the vibration time of the push button 120 is 3 seconds. Further, when the specific effect C is executed, the vibration time of the push button 120 is 5 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 33, in this embodiment, in the case of a big hit, the determination value is assigned so that the ratio of the specific effect being executed is higher than in the case of the loss. When the effect is executed, the degree of expectation for the big hit (big hit reliability) is higher than that when the specific effect is not executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 33, in this embodiment, it is determined that in the case of a big hit, the ratio of the specific effect B being executed is higher than that in the case of the loss. A value is assigned, and when the specific effect B is executed, the degree of expectation for the big hit (big hit reliability) is higher than that when the specific effect A is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 33, in this embodiment, the determination value is assigned so that the specific effect C may be executed only when the specific effect C is executed, and if the specific effect C is executed, the specific effect C is executed. It is confirmed that Therefore, when the specific effect C is executed, the degree of expectation for the big hit (big hit reliability) is higher than that when the specific effect A and the specific effect B are executed.

In this embodiment, a case is shown in which it is determined that a big hit will be obtained if the specific effect C is executed, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and even if the specific effect C is out of order. The specific effect C may be configured to be executable at a low rate, and at least when the specific effect C is executed, the degree of expectation for a big hit is compared with the case where the specific effect A or the specific effect B is executed. It suffices if it is configured so that (big hit reliability) is high.

Further, in this embodiment, the jackpot reliability is increased when the specific effect is executed, or the jackpot reliability is increased in the order of the specific effect C, the specific effect B, and the specific effect A. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when a specific effect is executed, the reach reliability and the probability change reliability are set to be high, or the reach reliability and the probability change reliability are set to be high in the order of the specific effect B and the specific effect A. May be good.

Further, in this embodiment, the case where there are three types of specific effects A to C as the types of specific effects is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and for example, only one type or two types of specific effects are used. It may be configured to be executable, or four or more types of specific effects may be configured to be executable. For example, a specific effect type may be provided in which the accessory LED 202 provided in the effect accessory 201 emits light in a blue or green lighting color.

Further, in this embodiment, the case where the type of the specific effect and the vibration time of the push button 120 have a one-to-one correspondence is shown, but it is not necessarily limited to such a mode. For example, even if the vibration time of the push button 120 is 1 second, the specific effect A is not always executed, and the specific effect B and the specific effect C may be executed at a low rate. It may be configured as.

Further, in this embodiment, as a type of suggestive effect, a case where the vibration time of the push button 120 is different is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, as a type of suggestion effect, the intensity of the vibration operation of the push button 120 may be different, the vibration speed may be different, or the vibration pattern may be different (for example, the push button 120 may be continuously vibrated. (It may be vibrated intermittently, or it may be vibrated intermittently). Further, the type of suggestive effect may be configured by combining the vibration time, vibration intensity, vibration speed, and vibration pattern of the push button 120.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33, the presence / absence and type of the specific effect or the suggestion effect are different depending on whether or not the hit is a big hit, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. .. For example, a different specific effect determination table may be selected according to the type of the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command, and the presence / absence and type of the specific effect and the suggestion effect may be different. In this case, for example, the fluctuation pattern including Super Reach B is configured to make it easier to execute the specific effect or suggestion effect than the variation pattern including Super Reach A, or the type of specific effect or suggestion effect with high expectation is performed. It may be configured to be easy to select. Further, for example, a fluctuation pattern having a large number of pseudo-reams is configured to be easier to execute a specific effect or a suggestion effect than a variation pattern with a small number of pseudo-reams, or a type of specific effect or suggestion effect with a high degree of expectation is selected. It may be configured for ease of use.

Further, in this embodiment, the case where the suggestion effect is always executed when the specific effect is executed is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and for example, in FIG. 33, as a suggestion effect. A specific effect D that does not involve the vibration operation of the push button 120 may be provided. Further, not only the push button 120 may not be vibrated, but also the blackout display, the frame LED 28 may be turned off, and the button LED 360 may not be turned on, or any one of these may be configured. It may be configured not to perform a plurality or all.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33, the presence / absence and type of the specific effect and the suggestion effect are collectively determined by one lottery process, but the specific effect and the suggestion effect are defined. It may be configured to be decided by a separate lottery process. Then, by determining the specific effect and the suggestion effect by separate lottery processes, a pattern that executes both the specific effect and the suggestion effect and a pattern that executes only the specific effect (the specific effect is not noticed so much). It may be configured to have a pattern to be executed) and a pattern to execute only the suggestion effect (so-called Gase pattern).

Then, when it is decided to execute the specific effect (step S5005), the effect control CPU 101 sets the specific effect execution flag according to the type of the determined specific effect (step S5006). For example, if it is decided to execute the specific effect A, the specific effect A execution flag is set, and if it is decided to execute the specific effect B, the specific effect B execution flag is set, and the specific effect C is set. If it is decided to execute, the specific effect C execution flag is set.

34 and 35 are flowcharts showing the effect symbol changing process (step S802) in the effect control process process. In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 101 first subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step S8101) and 1 subtracts the value of the variation time timer (step S8102). When the process timer times out (step S8103), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step S8104). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step S8105).

Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not any of the specific effect execution flags (any of the specific effect A execution flag to the specific effect C execution flag) is set (step S8106). If none of the specific effect execution flags is set, the process proceeds to step S8126. If any of the specific effect execution flags is set, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is the start timing of the blackout display (blackout display) (step S8107). Whether or not it is the start timing of the blackout display can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the fluctuation time timer set in step S8006 of the effect symbol fluctuation start processing. If it is the start timing of the blackout display (Y in step S8107), the effect control CPU 101 starts the darkening display (blackout display) of the entire display screen of the effect display device 9 (step S8108), and the frame LED 28. Are all turned off (step S8109). Then, the process proceeds to step S8126.

If it is not the start timing of the blackout display (N in step S8107), the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is the start timing of the suggestion effect (step S8110). Whether or not it is the start timing of the suggestion effect can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the fluctuation time timer set in step S8006 of the effect symbol variation start process. Further, in this embodiment, it is assumed that the start timing of the suggestion effect arrives at the timing when a predetermined time (1 second in this example) elapses after the start timing of the darkening display.

If it is the start timing of the suggestion effect (Y in step S8110), the effect control CPU 101 starts driving the vibrator motor 126 and starts the vibration operation of the push button 120 as the suggestion effect (step S8111). .. Further, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the vibration time according to the type of the specific effect in the vibration time timer for measuring the vibration time of the push button 120 (step S8112). For example, if the specific effect A execution flag is set, the vibration time timer is set to a value equivalent to 1 second, and if the specific effect B execution flag is set, the vibration time timer is set to 3 seconds. Set the value corresponding to, and if the specific effect C execution flag is set, set the value corresponding to 5 seconds in the vibration time timer. Further, the effect control CPU 101 starts the lighting display of the button LED 360, and starts the lighting display of the push button 120 as a suggestion effect (step S8113). Then, the process proceeds to step S8126.

In this embodiment, the case where the button LED 360 is lit and displayed by executing the process of step S8113 is shown, but not limited to such a mode, the button LED 360 may be blinked and displayed. Good. Further, for example, the button LED 360 may be made to emit light in various lighting colors or in various lighting patterns, and the button LED 360 may be emitted by a lottery process according to the jackpot expectation, reach expectation, and probability change expectation. May be used to determine which lighting color or lighting pattern is used to emit light.

If it is not the start timing of the suggestion effect (N in step S8110), the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the value of the vibration time timer is 0 (step S8114). If the value of the vibration time timer is not 0 (N in step S8114), that is, if the push button 120 is vibrating, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the vibration time timer (step S8115) and subtracts it. It is confirmed whether or not the value of the subsequent vibration time timer is 0 (step S8116). If the value of the vibration time timer is 0 (that is, when the vibration time of the push button 120 is finished), the effect control CPU 101 stops driving the vibrator motor 126 and pushes as a suggestion effect. At the same time as ending the vibration operation of the button 120 (step S8117), the lighting display of the button LED 360 is ended, and the lighting display of the push button 120 as a suggestion effect is ended (step S8118). Then, the process proceeds to step S8126.

If the value of the vibration time timer is 0 (Y in step S8114), the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is the start timing of the specific effect (step S8119). Whether or not it is the start timing of the specific effect can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the fluctuation time timer set in step S8006 of the effect symbol variation start process. Further, in this embodiment, it is assumed that the start timing of the specific effect arrives at the timing when a predetermined time (1 second in this example) elapses after the vibration time of the push button 120 is finished.

If it is the start timing of the specific effect (Y in step S8119), the effect control CPU 101 starts lighting and displaying the accessory LED 202 provided on the effect accessory 201 with a display color corresponding to the type of the specific effect. Then, the execution of the specific effect is started (step S8120). For example, if the specific effect A execution flag is set, the effect of causing the accessory LED 202 provided in the effect accessory 201 to emit light with a white lighting color is started. Further, if the specific effect B execution flag is set, the effect of causing the accessory LED 202 provided in the effect accessory 201 to emit light in a red lighting color is started. Further, if the specific effect C execution flag is set, the effect of rainbow-colored display (rainbow display) is started by causing the accessory LED 202 provided in the effect accessory 201 to emit light by changing the lighting color in order. To do. Then, the process proceeds to step S8126.

If it is not the start timing of the specific effect (N in step S8119), the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is the end timing of the specific effect (step S8121). Whether or not the end timing of the specific effect is reached can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the fluctuation time timer set in step S8006 of the effect symbol variation start process. Further, in this embodiment, it is assumed that the start timing of the specific effect arrives at the timing when the effect time (5 seconds in this example) of the predetermined specific effect elapses after the vibration time of the push button 120 is completed. The production time of the specific effect is not limited to 5 seconds, and may be configured to execute the specific effect for, for example, 7 seconds or 10 seconds.

If it is the end timing of the specific effect (Y in step S8121), the effect control CPU 101 ends the darkening display (blackout display) in the effect display device 9 (step S8122), and at the same time, the effect symbol is changed. The lighting display of the frame LED 28 is restarted accordingly (step S8123). Further, the effect control CPU 101 ends the lighting display of the accessory LED 202 provided on the effect accessory 201, and ends the execution of the specific effect (step S8124). Further, the effect control CPU 101 resets the set specific effect execution flag (any of the specific effect A execution flag to the specific effect C execution flag) (step S8125). Then, the process proceeds to step S8126.

In addition, in this embodiment, the case where the darkening display (blackout display) is ended or the lighting display of the frame LED 28 is restarted at the timing of the end of the specific effect is shown, but it is shown in this embodiment. It is not limited to the aspect. For example, the darkening display (blackout display) may be ended or the lighting display of the frame LED 28 may be resumed during the vibration operation of the push button 120 or at the timing of the end of the vibration operation, or the accessory LED 202 of the effect accessory 201 may be resumed. The darkening display (blackout display) may be ended or the lighting display of the frame LED 28 may be restarted at the timing of starting the lighting display or during the lighting display. Further, for example, the darkening display (blackout display) may be ended or the lighting display of the frame LED 28 may be restarted after a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed from the end of the specific effect. Conceivable.

In this embodiment, the case where the execution timing of the suggestion effect and the specific effect is the same regardless of the type of the suggestion effect and the specific effect is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, even if the suggestion effect or the specific effect can be executed at a plurality of execution timings, such as executing the suggestion effect or the specific effect during high-speed fluctuation, executing it when the reach is established, or executing it during the reach. Good. Further, in this case, for example, the jackpot expectation, the reach expectation, and the probability variation expectation may be different depending on at which execution timing the suggestion effect or the specific effect is executed.

Then, if the fluctuation time timer has timed out (step S8126), the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803) (step S8127).

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process process. In the effect symbol fluctuation stop process, the effect control CPU 101 first confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag indicating that the stop symbol of the effect symbol is displayed is set (step S8301). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8305. In this embodiment, when the jackpot symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, the stop symbol display flag is set in step S8304. Then, the stop symbol display flag is reset when the fanfare effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set means that the jackpot symbol has been stopped and displayed, but the fanfare effect has not yet been executed. Therefore, the process of displaying the stop symbol of the effect symbol in step S8302 is executed. Without fail, the process proceeds to step S8305.

When the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 controls to stop and display the determined stop symbol (missing symbol, jackpot symbol) (step S8302).

Next, when neither the big hit symbol nor the small hit symbol is displayed in the process of step S8302 (that is, when the off symbol is displayed) (N in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 shifts to step S8311. To do.

When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step S8302 (Y in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 sets the stop symbol display flag (step S8304).

Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not any of the jackpot start designation commands has been received (step S8305). Whether or not any of the jackpot start designation commands has been received is specifically determined by a flag indicating that the jackpot start designation command set in the command analysis process has been received (big hit start designation command reception flag). It can be determined by checking whether or not the flag (small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command reception flag) indicating that the small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command has been received is set. If any of the jackpot start designation commands is received, the effect control CPU 101 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S8306) and selects the process table according to the fanfare effect (step S8307). If the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the set flag.

Then, the effect control CPU 101 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S8308), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). Control of the effect device (the effect display device 9 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and the speaker 27 as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1 and the movable member control data 1) (step S8309). After that, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) (step S8310).

When it is determined that neither the big hit nor the small hit is performed (N in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 responds to the effect pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) by changing the value of the effect control process flag. Update to the value (step S8311).

Next, a specific example of the production mode of the suggestion effect and the specific effect will be described. FIG. 37 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the effect mode of the suggestion effect and the specific effect. In FIG. 37, the display screens change in the order of (1), (2), (3), and so on.

As shown in FIG. 37 (1), it is assumed that the effect display device 9 is executing the variable display of the left, middle, and right effect symbols, and determines the execution of the specific effect at the start of the variation. At the start timing of the blackout display (blackout display), as shown in FIG. 37 (2), the blackout display (blackout display) of the entire display screen of the effect display device 9 is started (see step S8108). All the frame LEDs 28 are turned off (see step S8109).

The example shown in FIG. 37 shows a case where the entire display screen of the effect display device 9 is completely darkened when the darkening display (blackout display) is performed, but it is limited to such a mode. Absent. For example, even during dark display (blackout display), the fourth symbol in the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d may be continuously displayed, or some small symbol may be displayed. The small symbol may be continuously displayed, or the right-handed display may be continuously displayed when the right-handed display suggesting the right-handed operation is performed. As such, even during the dark display (blackout display), the information necessary for the progress of the game may be continuously displayed.

Next, at the start timing of the suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 37 (3), the vibration operation of the push button 120 as the suggestion effect is started (see step S8111), and the lighting display of the button LED 360 is started. The lighting display of the push button 120 as a suggestion effect is started (see step S8113). In this case, when the push button 120 is vibrated, the vibrated member 303 inside the push button 120 also vibrates, and the vibration of the vibrated member 303 is emphasized and visually recognized.

Next, when the vibration time of the push button 120 ends, as shown in FIG. 37 (4), the vibration operation of the push button 120 as a suggestion effect ends (see step S8117), and the lighting display of the button LED 360 ends. Then, the lighting display of the push button 120 as a suggestion effect is terminated (see step S8118).

Next, at the start timing of the specific effect, as shown in FIG. 37 (5), the lighting display of the accessory LED 202 provided on the effect accessory 201 is started, and the execution of the specific effect is started (see step S8120). ). In this case, for example, when the specific effect A is executed, an effect of causing the accessory LED 202 provided in the effect accessory 201 to emit light with a white lighting color is started. Further, when the specific effect B is executed, the effect of causing the accessory LED 202 provided in the effect accessory 201 to emit light in a red lighting color is started. Further, when the specific effect C is executed, the effect of causing the accessory LED 202 provided in the effect accessory 201 to emit light by changing the lighting color in order to emit light by rainbow color display (rainbow display) starts. Will be done.

After that, when the production time of the specific effect (5 seconds in this example) elapses and the end timing of the specific effect is reached, the lighting display of the accessory LED 202 provided on the effect accessory 201 is terminated, and the specific effect is produced. Execution is terminated (see step S8124). Further, the darkening display (blackout display) in the effect display device 9 is also terminated (see step S8122), and the lighting display of the frame LED 28 is restarted according to the variation display of the effect symbol (see step S8123).

As described above, according to this embodiment, the effect device capable of executing the effect (in this example, the effect accessory 201) and the movable movable body (in this example, the push button 120) are provided. Be prepared. Further, it is possible to execute a specific effect (in this example, the specific effect of the aspect shown in FIG. 37 (5)) in the vicinity of the movable body by using the effect device, and the movable body can be operated when the specific effect is executed. (In this example, after the vibration operation of the push button 120 shown in FIG. 37 (3), the specific effect shown in FIG. 37 (5) is executed). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the specific effect.

Specifically, in this embodiment, since the production accessory 201 as the production device is provided below the game area 7, it is possible to make the light emission of the accessory LED 202 of the production accessory 201 stand out to some extent. At the time before the light emission, the player does not know which area of the game area 7 to pay attention to, and there is a possibility that the effect of the specific effect cannot be sufficiently obtained. Therefore, in this embodiment, the push button 120 that vibrates by operating the movable body (push button 120 in this example) provided in the vicinity of the effecting object 201 (vibrating operation in this example). By turning the eyes, the player's line of sight can be guided to the specific effect, and the effect of the specific effect can be improved.

In this embodiment, "when the specific effect is executed" is specifically the timing at which a predetermined time (1 second in this example) has elapsed after the vibration operation of the push button 120 is completed. Is to execute a specific effect with. In this way, the specific effect may be executed after a relatively short time (1 second in this example) has elapsed after the vibration operation of the push button 120 is completed, or the vibration of the push button 120 may be executed. The operation and the specific effect may be executed at exactly the same timing, or the vibration time of the push button 120 and the effect period of the specific effect partially overlap (for example, after the vibration operation of the push button 120 is started, it is still It may be configured to start the execution of the specific effect during the vibration operation). In this way, "when the specific effect is executed" means at least the vibration operation of the push button 120 and the specific effect, regardless of whether the execution timings of the vibration operation of the push button 120 and the specific effect are exactly the same or not the same. It suffices if it is executed at a timing that can be recognized as being executed correspondingly to and.

Further, in this embodiment, the case where the effect device (in this example, the effect accessory 201) is provided on the game board 6 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the effect accessory used for the specific effect may be provided on the game frame in the vicinity of the push button 120.

Further, “near the movable body” means, for example, the area A where the effect display device 9 is provided, the area B where the effect accessory 201 is provided, and the push button 120. When the region is the region C, the distance between the regions BC may be shorter than the distance between the regions AB. With such a configuration, the effecting accessory 201 is provided in an area where the distance from the push button 120 is shorter than the distance from the effect display device 9 that the player's eyes are usually facing. The line of sight of the player can be effectively guided.

Further, the “neighborhood of the movable body” may be configured such that the distance between the above-mentioned areas BC is shorter than the size of the display screen of the effect display device 9. For example, when the size of the display screen of the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) is 15 inches (38.1 cm), the distance between the areas BC is configured to be less than 38.1 cm. May be good. With such a configuration, the effector 201 and the push button 120 are arranged in an area smaller than the size of the entire display screen of the effect display device 9 that the player usually pays attention to. The line of sight can be effectively guided.

Further, in this embodiment, as an aspect of the effect device in the vicinity of the movable body, a case where the effect object 201 is provided relatively close to the push button 120 via the out port 26 is shown. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, even on the game area 7, the effector 201 may be provided immediately above the push button 120, and as described above, the effector may be placed on the game frame near the push button 120. The object 201 may be provided. Further, the movable body such as the push button 120 and the effecting object 201 may be integrally configured. As described above, the "neighborhood of the movable body" means that the movable body such as the push button 120 is provided at a distance that can guide the line of sight of the player to the specific effect using the effect object 201. Good.

Further, in this embodiment, the case where the effect device used for the specific effect is the effect accessory 201 provided with the accessory LED 202 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, a lamp / LED provided in a specific area, a sub-liquid crystal display device, or the like may be used as the effect device to execute the specific effect in some form.

Further, in this embodiment, the case where the movable body is the push button 120 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the movable body may be configured to include a movable member that can operate within a predetermined operating range, and the suggestive effect may be executed by operating the movable member provided in the vicinity of the effect device. ..

Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute the specific effect after the movable body is operated (in this example, after the vibration operation of the push button 120 shown in FIG. 37 (3), FIG. 37 (5) Execute the specific effect shown in). Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to the specific effect before the start of the specific effect.

In this embodiment, after the vibration operation of the push button 120 is stopped and a predetermined time (1 second in this example) elapses, the accessory LED 202 of the effect accessory 201 is lit and displayed to execute the specific effect. It shows the case of starting, but is not limited to such a mode. For example, the vibration operation of the push button 120 may be terminated after the accessory LED 202 of the effect accessory 201 is lit and displayed during the vibration operation of the push button 120. Even with such a configuration, since the vibration operation of the push button 120 has already started before the start of the specific effect, the specific effect can be focused on before the start of the specific effect. Further, for example, at the same time as the vibration operation of the push button 120 is stopped, the accessory LED 202 of the effect accessory 201 may be turned on and displayed to start the execution of the specific effect, and various aspects can be considered.

Further, in this embodiment, a case where the vibration operation of the push button 120 is started after a predetermined time (1 second in this example) has elapsed after starting the darkening display (blackout display) in the effect display device 9. Although shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the push button 120 may be configured to start the vibration operation at the same time as the blackout display (blackout display) or the frame LED is turned off, and various modes can be considered.

Further, according to this embodiment, the movable body is an operating means (push button 120 in this example) that can be operated by the player, and the operating means is vibrated when a specific effect is executed (this embodiment). In the example, after the vibration operation of the push button 120 shown in FIG. 37 (3), the specific effect shown in FIG. 37 (5) is executed). Further, the operating means includes a decorative member (in this example, the vibrated member 303 shown in FIGS. 2 and 3) in which the vibration operation can be visually recognized. Therefore, the line of sight of the player can be guided to a specific effect by sight and touch.

In this embodiment, the case where the decorative member (in this example, the vibrated member 303) is included in the push button 120 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, it does not necessarily have to be built in the push button 120, and some decorative member may be provided in the vicinity of the push button 120. Then, for example, the vibration operation of the push button 120 may be transmitted, and the decorative member provided in the vicinity thereof may also be configured to vibrate. Anything that can emphasize the vibration operation of the push button 120 in some form is sufficient.

Further, according to this embodiment, the display means is darkened when the specific effect is executed (in this example, as shown in FIG. 37 (2), the entire display screen of the effect display device 9 is darkened. (Blackout display). Further, the movable body can be operated while the light emitting body for effect (frame LED 28 in this example) is turned off (in this example, as shown in FIG. 37 (3), the effect display device 9 is darkened. The push button 120 is vibrated while being displayed (blackout display) and all the frame LEDs 28 are turned off). Therefore, it is possible to more effectively guide the player's line of sight to a specific effect. Specifically, in this embodiment, the effect display device 9 is darkened (blacked out) and nothing is displayed, and all the frame LEDs 28 of the game frame are turned off, so that the push button 120 vibrates. Can be made more conspicuous, and the player's line of sight can be effectively guided to a specific effect.

In this embodiment, the case where all the frame LEDs 28 are turned off as the light emitting body for the effect is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, it is not always necessary to turn off all the lamps / LEDs provided in the game machine, and a plurality of lamps / LEDs may be configured to be turned off, and one lamp / LED (for example, a light emitting area) may be turned off. It may be configured to turn off only the lamp / LED) which is large and particularly conspicuous. Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which the button LED 360 of the push button 120 is turned on to emphasize the push button 120 when the suggestion effect is executed even when the frame LED 28 is off. However, the button LED 360 may also be turned off while the frame LED 28 is turned off.

Further, according to this embodiment, the movable body is operated by a plurality of types of operation modes including at least a first operation mode (for example, a vibration time of 1 second) and a second operation mode (for example, a vibration time of 3 seconds). It is possible (see FIG. 33). Then, the execution mode of the specific effect differs depending on whether the movable body is operated according to the first operation mode or the movable body is operated according to the second operation mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 33, the vibration time 1 When the vibration operation of the push button 120 for 2 seconds is performed, the specific effect A is executed, and when the vibration operation of the push button 120 for 3 seconds is performed, the specific effect B is executed). Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the operation mode of the movable body.

In this embodiment, the type of specific effect to be executed differs depending on the operation mode of the movable body (in this example, the vibration time of the push button 120), but the mode is not limited to such a mode. .. For example, it may be configured so that the presence or absence of execution of the specific effect differs depending on the operation mode of the movable body (in this example, the vibration time of the push button 120). As such, it suffices that the execution mode (presence / absence and type of execution) of the specific effect differs depending on the operation mode of the movable body in some form.

Embodiment 2.
In the first embodiment, a predetermined display is further configured to be displayable in a predetermined area of the display area that is difficult for the player to see, and a line-of-sight guidance effect that guides the player's line of sight to the predetermined area is displayed in the display area. It may be configured to be feasible. Hereinafter, a second embodiment in which the line-of-sight guidance effect can be executed will be described.

In this embodiment, detailed description of the portion having the same configuration and processing as that of the first embodiment will be omitted, and a portion different from that of the first embodiment will be mainly described.

First, aspects of the effect display device 9 and the accessory 50 in this embodiment will be described. The accessory 50 is fixed to the game board 6 with screws (screws) or an adhesive (not shown). The accessory 50 is a member having an L-shaped cross section having a portion 50A protruding forward from the game board 6 and a portion 50B hanging downward from the tip of the protruding portion (see FIG. 39 and the like). As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the accessory 50 covers the upper region 5B, which is a portion other than the lower region 5A of the display area of the effect display device 9, from the front by the portion 50B. Therefore, the upper region 5B is the portion 50B when the player views the effect display device 9 from the front (when viewed in the normal posture of sitting on a chair and playing the game) (when viewed in the first posture). It is a difficult-to-see area that is hidden behind and cannot be seen, and cannot be seen unless the player looks into it from below (without taking a second posture). The display area of the effect display device 9 is composed of an upper area 5B and a lower area 5A (a region that can be visually recognized when the effect display device 9 is viewed from the front).

Further, in this embodiment, when the advance notice effect setting process is executed in the effect symbol change start process (step S801) of the effect control process process and it is decided to execute the advance notice effect, the effect symbol change start process is performed. In step S8003 of the above, a process table corresponding to the advance notice effect is selected, and the process of step S8005 of the effect symbol change start process and the effect symbol change process (step S802) are executed according to the process table according to the advance notice effect. During the variable display of the effect symbol, a notice effect for notifying the expectation of super reach execution, the jackpot expectation, and the like is executed (see FIGS. 40 to 42). The notice effect is an effect of displaying a mini image, and the combination of the displayed mini images announces the degree of expectation that the super reach will be executed and the degree of expectation of a big hit. The notice production is executed before the reach is established. In this embodiment, mini-images A to C are prepared as mini-images displayed in the advance notice effect (see FIG. 40 and the like). In addition, each mini-image moves on a different route (see FIG. 40).

Areas Z1 to Z3 are set as areas for displaying a mini image in the display area of the effect display device 9 (see FIG. 41 and the like). One mini-image may be displayed in each area. If the displayed area is the area Z1, the mini image moves in the area Z1, if the displayed area is the area Z2, the mini image moves in the area Z2, and the displayed area is the area Z3. If so, it moves in the area Z3.

The region Z1 is arranged at the boundary between the lower region 5A and the upper region 5B (see FIG. 41 and the like). Therefore, when the effect display device 9 is viewed from the front, the mini image displayed in the area Z1 (moving in the area Z1) may be hidden behind the accessory 50 (part 50B) or from the back of the accessory 50. It looks like it appears. When the player sees such a mini-image, he thinks that there may be something behind the character 50 (upper area 5B) and tries to look into it (the mini-image raises the player's line of sight). We are leading to region 5B).

The region Z2 is arranged in the lower left region (the region in the lower left when facing the lower region 5A) of the lower region 5A (see FIG. 41 and the like). The mini image displayed in the area Z2 (moving in the area Z2) can always be visually recognized when the effect display device 9 is viewed from the front.

The area Z3 is arranged in the right area (the area on the right side of the upper area 5B) (see FIG. 41 and the like). Since the upper region 5B is an region hidden by the accessory 50, the region Z3 cannot be visually recognized when the effect display device 9 is viewed from the front. The mini image displayed in the area Z3 (moving in the area Z3) is visually recognized by the line of sight guided by the mini image displayed in the area Z1 (when the player looks from below).

When only one type of mini-image is displayed, the expectation (possibility) that super reach will be executed is announced. Specifically, by displaying only one to three mini-images A, the degree of expectation that Super Reach A will be executed is foretold. Similarly, by displaying only one to three mini images B, the degree of expectation that Super Reach B will be executed is foretold, and by displaying only one to three mini images C, Super Reach is displayed. The degree of expectation that C will be executed is announced. The larger the number of mini-images, the higher the degree of expectation (the execution rate of the corresponding super reach) (determined by 3).

When multiple types of mini-images are displayed, the jackpot expectation is announced. Specifically, the mini image A and the mini image B are displayed, the mini image A and the mini image C are displayed, the mini image B and the mini image C are displayed, and the mini images A to C are displayed. All are displayed, and each combination gives a notice of the jackpot expectation. When the mini images A to C are displayed, the "big hit" is confirmed, and the expectation of a big hit is high in the order of mini image B + mini image C> mini image A + mini image C> mini image A + mini image C.

(Example of production screen)
Next, an example of the effect screen in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 to 42. In addition, in FIG. 41 and the like, the downward arrows drawn in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R indicate that the decorative symbol is changing.

(Movement of mini image)
The mini images A to C displayed in the areas Z1 to Z3 move as shown in FIG. 40. For example, the mini image A reciprocates in an oblique direction (FIG. 40 (A)). The mini image B moves so as to draw a square locus (FIG. 40 (B)). The mini image C moves so as to draw a trajectory of a substantially triangular shape (FIG. 40 (C)). In this way, the mini images A to C behave differently. It should be noted that each of the mini-images A to C behaves in the same manner regardless of which of the areas Z1 to Z3 is set as the display position.

(Example of a production screen of a notice production that targets the expectation that Super Reach will be executed)
FIG. 41 (A) is an effect screen when a notice effect for displaying the mini image A in each of the areas Z1 to Z3 is executed. FIG. 41 (B) is an effect screen when a notice effect for displaying the mini image B in each of the areas Z1 to Z3 is executed. FIG. 41 (C) is an effect screen when a notice effect for displaying the mini image C in each of the areas Z1 to Z3 is executed. In the notice effects of FIGS. 41 (A) to 41 (C), three mini-images are displayed for each, so that the confirmation of the execution of the corresponding super reach is announced.

When the effect display device 9 is viewed from the front (hereinafter, also simply referred to as a front view), the lower portion of the region Z1 and Z2 are visible, but the upper portion of the region Z1 and the region Z3 are within the upper region 50B. It is hidden behind the accessory 50 and cannot be seen. Since the mini image displayed in the area Z1 moves between the invisible upper part and the visible lower part, it hides or appears behind the accessory 50 (the portion 50B extending downward). The player sees the movement of such a mini image and tries to look into the upper area 5B (particularly the area Z3) hidden by the accessory 50 in the display area of the effect display device 9 from below (the player's). The line of sight is guided by the movement of the mini image). For this reason, the interest of the game is improving.

Further, since the area Z3 cannot be visually recognized when viewed from the front, a notice effect in which one mini image is displayed in each of the areas Z1 to Z3 and a notice effect in which one mini image is displayed in each of the areas Z1 and Z2. Has the same appearance of the notice effect in the front view (mini images are displayed in the areas Z1 and Z2). Therefore, it is difficult to determine whether two or three mini-images are displayed (that is, whether or not the third mini-image is displayed), and the player uses the area Z3 as an accessory. By peeking from below 50 and confirming, it is confirmed whether or not three mini-images are displayed (that is, whether or not the corresponding super reach execution is confirmed). For this reason, the interest of the game is improving.

Similar to the above description, the notice effect in which one mini image is displayed in each of the areas Z1 and Z3 and the notice effect in which one mini image is displayed in the area Z1 have the same appearance when viewed from the front. Therefore, the player looks into the area Z3 from under the accessory 50 to check whether or not two mini-images are displayed (that is, is it likely that the corresponding super reach is executed). ) Is confirmed. For this reason, the interest of the game is improving.

(Example of a production screen for a notice production that targets the big hit expectation)
FIG. 42A is an effect screen when the advance notice effect of displaying the mini image A in the area Z1 and displaying the mini image B in the area Z2 is executed. FIG. 41B is an effect screen when a notice effect is executed in which the mini image A is displayed in the area Z1, the mini image B is displayed in the area Z2, and the mini image C is displayed in the area Z3. In the preview effect of FIG. 42, since the mini images A to C are displayed, the big hit is confirmed.

As in the case of FIG. 41, the mini image displayed in the area Z1 moves between the invisible upper part and the visible lower part, so that it is hidden or appears behind the accessory 50 (the portion 50B extending downward). The player sees the movement of such a mini image and tries to look into the upper area 5B (particularly the area Z3) hidden by the accessory 50 in the display area of the effect display device 9 from below (the player's). The line of sight is guided by the movement of the mini image). For this reason, the interest of the game is improving.

As in the case of FIG. 41, since the area Z3 cannot be visually recognized when viewed from the front, the notice effect shown in FIG. 42 (A) and the notice effect shown in FIG. 42 (B) have the same appearance in the front view. (A mini image A is displayed in the area Z1 and a mini image B is displayed in the area Z2). Therefore, the player looks into the area Z3 from below the accessory 50 to check whether or not the last mini image C is displayed (that is, the variable display during execution is confirmed as a "big hit". Check if there is any). For this reason, the interest of the game is improving.

(Effects of this embodiment, etc.)
As described above, according to the present embodiment, the mini image can be displayed in the upper region 50B (here, region Z3) which is hidden by the accessory 50 and cannot be visually recognized when viewed from the front (FIG. 41, etc.). Then, the player looks into the upper region 50B by the movement of the mini image displayed in the region Z1 (hidden behind the accessory 50 or appears from the back of the accessory 50, such as FIG. 41). As described above, in this embodiment, the player's line of sight can be guided to the upper region 50B (here, region Z3) by the movement of the mini image (hidden in the accessory 50 or appearing from the accessory 50). , The fun of the game is improving. It should be noted that such an effect of guiding the player's line of sight (here, an effect of moving the mini image) is also referred to as a line of sight guidance effect.

Further, in this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of mini images (particularly, mini images displayed in the area Z1 and the area Z3), and further, there are a plurality of types of movements of the mini image (here, the mini image). The movement differs depending on the type) (Fig. 40, etc.). As a result, the production has been diversified, and the interest of the game has improved. Further, in this embodiment, the mini image displayed in the area Z1 constitutes a notice effect, and the degree of expectation for super reach to be executed and the degree of expectation for big hit are announced depending on the type of the mini image, so that the player can use the notice. By paying attention to the type of the mini-image (that is, the player also pays attention to the mode of the line-of-sight guidance effect), the interest of the game is improved.

In addition, the player announces the degree of expectation that the super reach will be executed and the degree of expectation of a big hit by the advance notice effect, that is, by the combination of the mini images displayed in the areas Z1 to Z3 (inside and outside the upper area 50B). Search for a mini image over the entire display screen of the display device 9. As a result, the interest of the game is improved.

Further, by hiding the upper part of the area Z1 and the upper area 50B including the area Z3 with the accessory 50, the player is made to look from below, so that the range of the production is widened and the interest of the game is improved.

Further, in this embodiment, the appearance of the advance notice effect when viewed from the front (whether or not a mini image is displayed in the areas Z1 and Z2, etc.) can be said to be an execution mode of the advance notice effect in the lower area 5A. ) Alone, it is not possible to know the content of the notice announced by the notice effect during execution (here, the degree of expectation that Super Reach will be executed and the degree of expectation of big hit), and the player confirms the area Z3. It is only possible to understand. Therefore, the effect of the advance notice effect is enhanced, and the interest of the game is improved.

It is also possible to configure the game machine by appropriately combining the configurations shown in the first embodiment and the second embodiment shown above. For example, when applying the configuration shown in the first embodiment to the configuration shown in the second embodiment, it is urged to cover a part of the liquid crystal display device (effect display device 9) on the game area 7. A mini image such as a character image is displayed on the back side of the accessory 50 provided so as to be projected, and a part of the mini image is displayed so as to protrude from the back of the accessory 50 (for example, the character image appears or disappears in the area Z1). It may be configured so as to move and display), and the accessory 50 may be configured to vibrate in a rattling manner. In this case, (1) the accessory 50 vibrates in a rattling manner to attract attention to the accessory 50, (2) then the character image displayed outside the area 1 is focused, and (3) then the combination. The character image displayed in the area Z3 hidden behind the object 50 may be focused on, and the player's line of sight may be guided step by step.

In the above embodiment, there are variations in the fluctuation time, the type of reach effect, and the presence or absence of pseudo-ream (an effect in which one or more temporary stops and re-variations of symbols are executed during one variable display). An example was shown in which one variation pattern command was transmitted when the variation was started in order to notify the effect control microcomputer 100 of the variation pattern indicating the mode, but the variation pattern was produced and controlled by two or more commands. The microcomputer 100 may be notified. Specifically, when notifying with two commands, the game control microcomputer 560 uses the first command as the first command, such as the presence / absence of a pseudo-ream, the presence / absence of a sliding effect, etc. A command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the second stop is sent, and as the second command, the type of reach, the presence or absence of a re-lottery effect, etc., are so-called after reaching the reach (if not reaching). A command indicating the fluctuation time and the fluctuation mode (after the second stop) may be transmitted. In that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 may perform the effect control in the variable display (variable display) based on the variable time derived from the combination of the two commands. The game control microcomputer 560 may notify the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 100 may select a specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. .. When sending two commands, the two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after sending the first command (for example, the following A second command may be sent (in the timer interrupt). The variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to such an example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. By notifying the fluctuation pattern with two or more commands in this way, it is possible to reduce the amount of data that must be stored as the fluctuation pattern command.

Further, in the above embodiment, "different ratios" are not limited to those having different ratios due to a relationship such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. It is a concept that includes those having different ratios due to the relationship such as A: B = 100%: 0% (that is, one having 100% allocation and the other having 0% allocation).

Further, in the above embodiment, for example, a case is shown in which a plurality of types of special symbols, effect symbols, and ordinary symbols of "1" to "9" are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the variably displayed symbol and the derived symbol do not necessarily have to be the same, and a symbol different from the variably displayed symbol may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and the variable display may be executed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be executed by alternately lighting and blinking the one type of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed at the end, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol is derived and displayed at the end. It may be a thing.

Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is taken as an example of the gaming machine, but in the present invention, a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types are used according to the operation of the operation lever by the player. When the symbol is rotated and the symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by the player, if the combination of the stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, it is applied to the slot machine in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player. It is also possible.

Further, the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize, and a game medium such as a game ball is enclosed and a score is given when the conditions for giving the prize are satisfied. It can also be applied to a type of gaming machine.

Further, in the above embodiment, a gaming machine is shown in which the jackpot type includes a probabilistic jackpot and a normal jackpot, and the jackpot type is determined to be a probabilistic jackpot, and is controlled to a probabilistic state after the jackpot game ends. , Not limited to such gaming machines. For example, a special variable winning ball device provided with a predetermined probability variation region inside (a probability variation region may be provided in a special variable winning ball device provided with only one, or a plurality of special variable winning balls provided. A probability variation area may be provided in a part of the device), and the probability variation is determined based on the game ball passing through the probability variation area in the special variable winning ball device during the jackpot game, and the jackpot game It is also possible to apply the configuration shown in the above embodiment to the gaming machine controlled to the probabilistic state after the end.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The game machine of the present invention is also a game machine capable of performing a game, which is a production device capable of performing a production (for example, a production accessory 201) and an movable movable body (for example, a movable body 201). A specific effect executing means (for example, an effect control microcomputer 100) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, the specific effect of the aspect shown in FIG. 37 (5)) in the vicinity of the movable body using the push button 120) and the effect device. The movable body control means for operating the movable body (for example, the part for executing step S8111 in the effect control microcomputer 100), and the detection means capable of detecting the movement of the player (for example, the portion for executing step S8120). , Push button 9031B, stick controller 9031A, touch sensor, infrared sensor, camera, etc., and a specific display corresponding to the detection means (for example, small button (white) D901 shown in FIGS. 67, 74 to 80, large, large. Specific display execution means (for example, a button (white) D902, a large button (red) D903, a stick D904, a small button (white) D901U, a large button (white) D902U, a large button (red) D903U, a stick D904U, etc.) The movable body control means can operate the movable body when the specific effect is executed (for example, FIG. 37 (for example, FIG. 37), which includes a button development effect process (S90529), a variable display during effect process (S90172), etc.). After the vibration operation of the push button 120 shown in 3), the specific effect shown in FIG. 37 (5) is executed), and the specific display executing means is the first specific display (for example, a small button (white)) as the specific display. ) D901, etc.) and the degree of advantage for the player over the first specific display (for example, the jackpot expectation, the expectation of 16R probability variation jackpot (see FIG. 49), and the probability variation jackpot when there is a normal jackpot and a probability variation jackpot. The second specific display (for example, when the first specific display is the small button (white) D901, the second specific display is the large button (white) D902, the large button (red) D903, and the stick D904. Etc., when the first specific display is the large button (white) D902, the second specific display is the large button (red) D903, stick D904, etc., and when the first specific display is the large button (red) D903, The second specific display can display the stick D904 or the like), and the first specific display is displayed during the non-valid period of detection by the detection means (for example, T4 to T11 shown in FIGS. 71 to 80). Later, the first specific display is displayed as the second. After changing to a specific display (for example, after displaying the small button (white) D901 as shown in FIG. 74 (C), the small button (white) D901 is displayed as the large button (white) D902 as shown in FIG. 75 (G). (The large button (white) D902 is further changed to the large button (red) D903 as shown in FIG. 75 (I)), and the valid period of detection by the detection means (for example, in FIGS. 71 to 80). In the T11 to T13 shown), the second specific display after the change (for example, a large button (red) D903, a large button (red) D903U, etc. as shown in FIGS. 75 (J) and 75 (K)). (For example, an effect of prompting an operation as shown in FIG. 75 (K) and notifying a result as shown in FIG. 75 (L)) is executed.

According to such a configuration, the effect of the specific effect can be improved.

Further, as an example of the form of the gaming machine capable of improving the effect of the effect, it is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901, slot machine, etc.) capable of playing a game, and can detect the movement of the player. Means (for example, push button 9031B, stick controller 9031A, touch sensor, infrared sensor, camera, etc.) and a specific display corresponding to the detection means (for example, the small button (white) shown in FIGS. 67, 74 to 80). Specific display execution means for performing D901, large button (white) D902, large button (red) D903, stick D904, small button (white) D901U, large button (white) D902U, large button (red) D903U, stick D904U, etc. (For example, button development effect processing (S90529), variable display during effect process (S90172), etc.), and the specific display execution means is the first specific display (for example, a small button (white)) as the specific display. D901 etc.) and the degree of advantage for the player over the first specific display (for example, the jackpot expectation, the expectation of 16R probability variation jackpot (see FIG. 49), and the probability variation jackpot when there is a normal jackpot and a probability variation jackpot. When the second specific display (for example, when the first specific display is the small button (white) D901, the second specific display is the large button (white) D902, the large button (red) D903, the stick D904, etc. , When the first specific display is the large button (white) D902, the second specific display is the large button (red) D903, stick D904, etc., and when the first specific display is the large button (red) D903, the first 2 The specific display can display the stick D904 or the like), and after displaying the first specific display during the non-valid period of detection by the detection means (for example, T4 to T11 shown in FIGS. 71 to 80). The first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, after displaying the small button (white) D901 as shown in FIG. 74 (C), the small button (white) D901 is changed to FIG. 75 (G). The large button (white) D902 is changed to the large button (white) D902 as shown, and the large button (white) D902 is changed to the large button (red) D903 as shown in FIG. 75 (I)), and the valid period of detection by the detection means. (For example, T11 to T13 shown in FIGS. 71 to 80), the large button (red) D903 as shown in the second specific display after the change (for example, FIGS. 75 (J) and 75 (K)). And large button (red) D903U, etc.) to promote operation (for example, as shown in FIG. 75 (K)) Then, as shown in FIG. 75 (L), there is a game machine in which the effect of notifying the result, etc.) is executed. Hereinafter, an example of the form example of this game machine will be described as another form example.

(Example of other forms)
Hereinafter, other form examples will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 901, which is an example of the gaming machine, will be described. In addition, other embodiment examples may be referred to as "embodiments". FIG. 43 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 901 according to another embodiment, showing the layout of the main members. The pachinko game machine 901 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 902 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (underframe) 903 that supports and fixes the game board 902. The game board 902 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails.

A normal winning ball device 906A and a normal variable winning ball device 906B are provided in the lower portion of the game area on the game board 902. The ordinary winning ball device 906A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting region (first starting region) that is always kept in a constant open state by, for example, a predetermined ball receiving member. The ordinary variable winning ball device 906B is an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state in a vertical position and an expanded open state in a tilted position by a solenoid 9081 for an ordinary electric accessory shown in FIG. It is equipped with a tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) and forms a starting area (second starting area) and a second starting winning opening. When the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening are not particularly distinguished, they are simply referred to as "starting winning openings".

The game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the ordinary winning ball device 906A is detected by, for example, the first starting opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. 44. The game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 906B is detected by, for example, the second starting opening switch 9022B shown in FIG. 44.

In addition, game balls that have passed (entered) the winning openings such as the starting winning opening (the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening) and the large winning opening (described later) are provided corresponding to the respective winning openings. Detection by switches (first start port switch 9022A, second start port switch 9022B, count switch 9023 (described later)) is referred to as "winning". Of the "winnings", winning the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening) is called "starting winning", and in particular, winning the first starting winning opening is called the first starting winning. , The prize in the second start prize opening is referred to as the second start prize.

Based on the occurrence of the first start winning prize (detection of the game balls by the first start port switch 9022A), a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first special figure reserved memory number (described later). ) Is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"), the decorative symbol executed in the first special symbol game (described later) or the image display device 905 (described later) executed in the first special symbol display device 904A. The first start condition (also referred to as the first execution condition) for executing the variable display game such as the variable display of is satisfied.

Based on the occurrence of the second start winning prize (detection of the game balls by the second start port switch 9022B), a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure reserved memory number (described later) ) Is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"), the decorative symbol executed in the second special symbol game (described later) or the image display device 905 (described later) executed in the second special symbol display device 904B. A second start condition (also referred to as a second execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as the variable display of is satisfied. The number of prize balls paid out based on the first starting prize and the number of prize balls paid out based on the second starting prize may be the same number or different numbers. Good.

The first special figure reservation number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the first start winning) that are not immediately executed when the first start winning is generated and the execution is temporarily suspended. Even if the first start condition for executing the variable display game such as the first special figure game (described later) and the variable display of the decorative symbol is satisfied by the occurrence of the first start prize, the first start prize is generated. When the first start condition that allows the start of the above-mentioned variable display game is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first or second start condition that is satisfied earlier is being executed or pachinko. When the gaming machine 901 is controlled to the jackpot gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is suspended (the variable display game is in a waiting state for execution). That is, the first special figure hold storage number is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the first start winning prize in the state of waiting for execution. The number of reserved first special figures is reduced by one each time one of the first start conditions is satisfied.

It should be noted that although the first start condition by a certain first start prize is satisfied, the variable display corresponding to the first start prize is not satisfied by the first start condition that allows the start of the variable display game by the first start prize. Information about the above is stored (held) as hold data (first special figure hold information) until the first start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game by the first start prize is satisfied. In other words, the reserved first special figure reservation information is digested one by one each time the first start condition is satisfied, and the variable display game based on the digested first special figure reservation information is executed.

The second special figure reserved memory number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the second start winning) that are not immediately executed when the second start winning is generated and the execution is temporarily suspended. Due to the occurrence of the second start prize, even if the second start condition for executing the variable display game such as the second special figure game (described later) and the variable display of the decorative symbol is satisfied, the second start prize is generated. When the second start condition that allows the start of the above-mentioned variable display game is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first or second start condition that is satisfied earlier is being executed or pachinko. When the gaming machine 901 is controlled to the jackpot gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is suspended (the variable display game is in a waiting state for execution). That is, the second special figure hold storage number is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the second start winning prize in the state of waiting for execution. The number of reserved second special figures is reduced by one each time one of the second start conditions is satisfied.

It should be noted that although the second start condition by a certain second start prize is satisfied, the variable display corresponding to the second start prize is not satisfied by the second start condition that allows the start of the variable display game by the second start prize. The information regarding the above is stored (held) as hold data (second special figure hold information) until the second start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game by the second start prize is satisfied. In other words, the reserved second special figure reservation information is digested one by one each time the second start condition is satisfied, and the variable display game based on the digested second special figure reservation information is executed.

The number of reserved memories obtained by adding the number of reserved memories of the first special figure and the number of reserved memories of the second special figure is referred to as "total reserved memory number". When the first special figure holding memory number, the second special figure holding storage number, and the total holding storage number are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as "special figure holding storage number" or "holding storage number". That is, one or two of the first special figure reserved storage number, the second special figure reserved storage number, and the total reserved storage number when simply referred to as "special figure reserved storage number" or "holding storage number". Or it may refer to three. Further, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as "start condition" or "execution condition". Further, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as "start condition". Further, when the first special figure reservation information and the second special figure reservation information are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as "special figure reservation information".

A special variable winning ball device 907 is provided in the lower portion of the game area on the game board 902. The special variable winning ball device 907 forms a large winning opening that changes between a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) and an open state in which the game ball can pass (enter). Specifically, the special variable winning ball device 907 includes, for example, a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 9082 for the large winning opening door shown in FIG. 44, and the state of the large winning opening by opening and closing the large winning opening door. Change (open state, closed state).

As an example, the special variable winning ball device 907 closes the big winning door when the solenoid 9082 is off to close the big winning door, and opens the big winning door when the solenoid 9082 is on. The large winning opening is opened. The game ball that has passed (entered) the open winning opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 9023 shown in FIG. That is, by opening the large winning opening, a prize is generated in the large winning opening.

A predetermined number (for example, 12) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the occurrence of a prize in the large prize opening (detection of game balls by the count switch 9023). The number of prize balls paid out based on the occurrence of a prize in the large prize opening (for example, 12) is the number of prize balls paid out based on the occurrence of the first start prize (for example, 3), and the second start prize. More than the number of prize balls paid out based on the occurrence of (for example, 3). That is, the state of the big winning opening (open state, closed state) has a great influence on whether or not it is advantageous for the player.

A first special symbol display device 904A and a second special symbol display device 904B are provided on the right side portion of the game area on the game board 902. The first special symbol display device 904A is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED (light emitting diode) of a dot matrix or the like. The same applies to the second special symbol display device 904B. The first special symbol display device 904A variably displays (variably displays) a special symbol (also referred to as a "special symbol") which is a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) capable of identifying each of them. The same applies to the second special symbol display device 904B. The special symbol (special symbol) variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A is also referred to as "first special symbol" or "special diagram 1", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 904B. (Special figure) is also referred to as "second special figure" or "special figure 2". Further, a game (or the variable display of the identification information itself) executed with the variable display of the identification information is referred to as a variable display game. In particular, the variable display game executed by the first special symbol display device 904A (variable display game for variablely displaying the first special symbol) is also referred to as the first special symbol game, and the variable display game executed by the second special symbol display device 904B. (Variable display game in which the second special figure is variably displayed) is also referred to as a second special figure game. Further, when the first special figure game and the second special figure game are not distinguished, it is also simply referred to as a "special figure game".

The first special symbol display device 904A (the same applies to the second special symbol display device 904B) is a special symbol game of a plurality of types composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". Variable display of special symbols. Each special symbol has a symbol number corresponding to each.

A first hold display 9025A and a second hold display 9025B are provided on the right side portion of the game area (upper part of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B) on the game board 902. .. The first hold indicator 9025A is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the first special figure hold storage number (the number of hold of the first special figure game) based on the hold data (first special figure hold information). The first hold display to be displayed as possible is performed. The second hold indicator 9025B is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the number of second special figure hold storages (the number of holds of the second special figure game) based on the hold data (second special figure hold information). A second hold display is performed to display as possible.

When the first hold display and the second hold display are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as "hold display". Further, the expression "hold display" may refer to an operation (LED lighting control by the first hold display 9025A and the second hold display 9025B), or may refer to the display itself (display by LED). .. For example, the hold display when it is said that the hold display is newly added indicates the newly added display itself. The same applies to the "hold display" in the start winning memory display area 905H (described later) and the "active display" (described later) in the active display area AHA'(described later).

On the left side of the game area on the game board 902, a passing gate 9041, a normal symbol display 9020, and a normal symbol hold display 9025C are provided. The game ball that has passed through the passing gate 9041 is detected by, for example, the gate switch 9021 shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 9041 is detected by the gate switch 9021, if the number of reserved memory (described later) is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"), the normal symbol display 9020 The normal map start condition for executing the normal map game (described later) executed in is satisfied.

The ordinary symbol display 9020 is composed of a 7-segment LED, a dot matrix LED, or the like, like the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B. The ordinary symbol display 9020 variably displays (variably displays) an ordinary symbol (also referred to as a "normal diagram" or "ordinary symbol") which is a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol. A variable display game in which a normal symbol is variably displayed is also referred to as a normal figure game (or "normal figure game"). Information about the Fuzu game in which the Fuzu start condition is satisfied but the Fuzu start condition (described later) is not satisfied is stored (held) as hold data (Public map hold information).

The normal figure hold display 9025C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages based on the hold data (normal figure hold information), for example, by the number of LEDs to be turned on. The normal figure hold memory number is the number of normal figure games whose execution is temporarily suspended without being immediately executed when the game ball passing through the passing gate 9041 is detected by the gate switch 9021. That is, the number of reserved fuzu games is the number of games of the fuzu game waiting to be executed. The number of reserved normal maps is reduced by 1 each time one condition for starting a normal map is satisfied.

An image display device 905 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 902. The image display device 905 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effects images.

Decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are arranged in the display area of the image display device 905. In the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, decorative symbols, which are a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them, are variably displayed. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, the decorative symbol starts to fluctuate in conjunction with (corresponding to) the special symbol game, and the final decorative symbol (also referred to as the final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed. .. The decorative symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol display area 905L is also referred to as a left symbol, the decorative symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol display area 905C is also referred to as a medium symbol, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol display area 905R is also referred to as a right symbol. Variable display of decorative patterns is also included in the variable display game.

In addition, a start winning memory display area 905H is arranged in the display area of the image display device 905. In the start winning prize storage display area 905H, the hold display corresponding to the hold information is performed. In the start winning prize memory display area 905H, for example, the hold display may be performed left-justified. That is, when the number of holdings of the special figure game increases due to the establishment of the new starting condition, the new holding is performed in order from the left end of the starting winning memory display area 905H (the closest side to the active display area AHA'). You may add a display. When the number of hold of the special figure game decreases due to the establishment of the new start condition, the hold display (the oldest hold display) displayed at the left end of the start prize memory display area 905H is deleted. , When there is another hold display, move (shift) the other hold display (each hold display when there are multiple other hold displays) to the left.

Further, in the display area of the image display device 905, an active display area (also referred to as a display area this time, an active hold display area, a display area at the time of digestion, etc.) AHA'is arranged. In the active display area, active display (also referred to as digestion display, this time display, etc.) is performed based on the fact that the hold display is deleted from the start winning memory display area 905H when the start condition is satisfied. That is, when the start condition is satisfied, the hold display displayed at the left end of the start winning memory display area 905H is moved (shifted) to the active display area AHA', and the active display is displayed. Hereinafter, the active display displayed based on the deletion of a certain hold display M may also be referred to as an active display corresponding to the hold display M.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 43, the active display area AHA'is arranged on the left side of the start winning memory display area 905H, but the active display area AHA'is any of the display areas of the image display device 905. It suffices if it is arranged at that position.

An upper plate and a lower plate are provided at predetermined positions of the game machine frame 903 below the game area. A stick controller 9031A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a member forming the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, the central portion of the lower plate). There is. The member forming the upper plate includes, for example, a push button 9031B capable of a player performing a predetermined instruction operation by pressing or the like at a predetermined position on the front side (for example, above the stick controller 9031A) on the upper surface of the upper plate body. It is provided.

A voice output member is provided in the peripheral portion of the game area of the game machine frame 903. In the example shown in FIG. 43, the speaker 908UL and the speaker 908UR are installed at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 903, and the speaker 908LL and the speaker 908LR are placed at the lower left and right oblique parts of the upper plate (the upper left and right oblique parts of the lower plate). It is installed. Hereinafter, when the speakers 908UL, 908UR, 908LL, and 908LR are not particularly distinguished, they are simply referred to as speakers 908.

A movable accessory (movable body) that operates as an effect or decoration is provided inside and around the game area of the game machine frame 903. In the example shown in FIG. 43, the upper position of the image display device 905 is from the first position (initial position shown in FIG. 43) to the second position (lower end position. For example, the position in front of the display area of the image display device 905). A movable accessory 9017 that can move up to is provided.

Further, a light emitting member (light emitting body) that emits light as an effect or decoration is provided inside and around the game area of the game machine frame 903. In the example shown in FIG. 43, the light emitting member 909CC is installed on the movable accessory 9017, the light emitting member 909CL and the light emitting member 909CR are installed at the left and right positions of the image display device 905, and the light emitting member is installed at the upper position of the gaming machine frame 903. Light emitting members 909SL and light emitting members 909SR are installed at the left and right positions of the 909U and the game machine frame 903. Hereinafter, when the light emitting members 909CC, 909CL, 909CR, 909U, 909SL, and 909SR are not particularly distinguished, they are simply referred to as lamps 909.

The image display device 905, the speaker 908, the lamp 909, and the movable accessory 9017 described above are production devices that execute the effect, but the game machine 901 has other effects such as a device having a vibrating portion and a device having a blower portion. It may be equipped with a device.

Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be schematically described.

In the pachinko game machine 901, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 9020 is started based on the fact that the normal map start condition is satisfied after the normal map start condition is satisfied. In the normal symbol game, after the variable display of the normal symbol is started (after the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started), when the predetermined time that becomes the normal symbol fluctuation time elapses, the fixed normal symbol that becomes the variable display result of the normal symbol is obtained. Is stopped and displayed (derivative display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) such as a number indicating "7" is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol is "per normal symbol (per ordinary symbol)". ". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the normal symbol, such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating "7", is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol is "normal symbol loss (normal)". Design loss) ”. In response to the variable display result of the normal symbol being "per normal figure", the expansion / opening control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball device 906B is in the tilt position. However, normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position after a predetermined time has elapsed.

In the pachinko game machine 901, the first special figure game is started based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied after the first start condition is satisfied, and the second start condition is satisfied after the second start condition is satisfied. Based on this, the second special figure game is started. In the special symbol game, after the variable display of the special symbol is started (after the fluctuation of the special symbol is started), when the variable display time as the special symbol fluctuation time elapses, the variable display result of the special symbol is confirmed special. The symbol (special figure display result) is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" as a specific display result, and if a special symbol different from the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, " It becomes "missing". If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it may be a "small hit" as the predetermined display result.

In the pachinko gaming machine 901 according to the present embodiment, as an example, a special symbol indicating the numbers "3", "5", and "7" is used as a jackpot symbol, and a special symbol indicating the symbol "-" is used as a lost symbol. Note that different special symbols in the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game may be used as jackpot symbols.

After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", the pachinko game machine 901 is controlled to the big hit game state which is a specific game state. The pachinko gaming machine 901 controls the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 907 to be in the open state in the big hit game state. The jackpot gaming state in which the jackpot is controlled to be open is an example of an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player. Further, after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", the pachinko game machine 901 is controlled to the small hit game state which is a special game state different from the big hit game state.

Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 901 determines a round (also referred to as “round game”) that is advantageous to the player in the jackpot game state after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”. (Predetermined number of rounds), execute. The round is an open cycle of the big winning opening. In each round (each round), the pachinko gaming machine 901 opens and closes the large winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 907 to change the state (open state, closed state) of the large winning opening. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 901 opens the big prize opening door at the start of the round to change the big winning opening from the closed state to the open state, keeps the big winning opening open, and then closes the big winning door. The big winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state, and one round is completed. In the round, the big prize opening is whether a predetermined upper limit opening time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses after opening the big prize opening door, or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of prizes are generated for the big winning opening. It is maintained in the open state until any of the conditions is satisfied.

The pachinko gaming machine 901 repeatedly executes rounds in the jackpot game state until the number of rounds executed reaches a predetermined upper limit. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 901 executes the round even before the number of times the round is executed reaches the predetermined upper limit, if the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the game ball does not win the big winning opening). May be terminated. In the present embodiment, the predetermined upper limit is two types (8 times corresponding to 8R and 16 times corresponding to 16R; see FIG. 49), but may be one type or three or more types. You may.

In the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R arranged in the display area of the image display device 905, variable display of the decorative symbol is started in response to the start of the special symbol game. In addition, the reach state may be reached during the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the end of the variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative symbol. The reach state is a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 905 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination (also referred to as a "reach variable symbol"). Is a display state in which the fluctuation is continuous, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols are fluctuating in synchronization while forming all or part of the jackpot combination. The production in the reach state is called the reach production.

As the effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as "reach patterns") having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, depending on the effect pattern, the possibility that the jackpot combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed after the reach effect (also referred to as “big hit expectation” or “big hit reliability”) may be different.

The expectation of a big hit by a certain effect is, for example, (probability that the effect is executed at the time of a big hit) × (probability of being a big hit) / {(probability that the effect is executed at the time of a big hit) × (probability of being a big hit). It is calculated by + (probability that the effect is executed other than at the time of big hit) x (probability that it does not become big hit)}. If a certain effect always results in a "big hit", the expected degree of big hit for that effect is "1". The same applies to the degree of expectation of super reach due to a certain production.

The reach production is a production that gives notice and suggests to the player that the big hit expectation is high, but the pachinko gaming machine 901 gives a notice to the player that the big hit expectation is high in addition to the reach production. Suggested effects (for example, hold effects, pseudo-continuous effects, etc.) can be executed. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 901 can execute an effect (for example, a hold effect, a slip effect, etc.) that gives notice or suggests to the player that any reach effect or a certain reach effect will be executed. Hereinafter, the effect of notifying or suggesting to the player that any reach effect or a certain reach effect may be executed or that the expectation of a big hit is high may be collectively referred to as a notice effect.

It should be noted that the notification (notice, suggestion) by the advance notice effect may be performed before the player recognizes whether or not the notification content is realized. For example, the advance notice effect for notifying the possibility of reaching the reach state may be performed before the reach state (or non-reach state) is reached. Further, the advance notice effect for notifying the possibility that the variable display result may be a "big hit" may be performed before the final decoration symbol is stopped and displayed.

The advance notice effect may include a look-ahead advance notice effect (also referred to as "preliminary determination advance notice effect"). In the pre-reading notice effect, before starting the variable display that is the target of the notice, it is determined whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" based on the hold information of the special figure game. (Look ahead), it is a notice effect to be executed based on the judgment result. In the following description, the hold information targeted for the pre-reading notice effect is referred to as the target hold information, the hold display corresponding to the target hold information is referred to as the target hold display, and the variable display corresponding to the target hold information is referred to. Also called variable display of the target. The active display corresponding to the hold display of the target (active display displayed during the variable display of the target) is also referred to as the active display of the target.

The display mode of the active display may be determined at the time of winning, at the time of the hold display (before it becomes the active display), or when it becomes the active display (at the start of the fluctuation). May be decided. Further, the display mode of the hold display and the display mode of the active corresponding to the hold display (active display displayed by deleting the hold display) may be the same (or substantially the same). They may be related to each other. The same (or substantially the same) display mode means that, for example, an active display having the same or substantially the same display mode as the display mode of the hold display before erasure is displayed.

When the display modes are related to each other, for example, there are three types of display modes having different jackpot expectations (expectation of display mode a> expectation of display mode b> expectation of display mode c) as display modes of hold display. However, as the display mode of the active display, three types of display modes having different jackpot expectations (expectation of display mode s> expectation of display mode t> expectation of display mode u. However, the display mode s is display mode a, Different from any of b and c, the display mode t is different from any of the display modes a, b and c, and the display mode u is different from any of the display modes a, b and c). When the hold display is deleted, the active display of the display mode s is displayed, when the hold display of the display mode b is deleted, the active display of the display mode t is displayed, and when the hold display of the display mode c is deleted, the active display is displayed. The active display of aspect u is displayed. In addition, when the active display effect at the time of addition described later is executed, when the hold display of the display mode a is deleted, the active display of the display mode t or the display mode u is displayed, and the hold display of the display mode b is deleted. When this is done, the active display of the display mode u is displayed.

In the present embodiment, as the pre-reading notice effect, the hold effect according to the display mode of the hold display in the start winning prize memory display area 905H can be executed. For the hold effect, for example, the hold display to be added to the start winning memory display area 905H is displayed in a notice mode (blue or red in the present embodiment) different from the normal mode (white in the present embodiment) (hold at the time of addition). The effect (effect) and the effect (hold change effect) of changing the already displayed hold display to the notice mode (including the change from one notice mode to another notice mode) are included.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the pre-reading notice effect, it is an effect to be executed when the hold display is changed to the notice mode, and a character or the like is displayed in the display area of the image display device 905 to directly display the hold display. An effect that indirectly acts (holding action effect. It may be referred to as "holding action success effect" to distinguish it from "holding action failure effect" described later) is feasible. Further, it may be possible to execute an effect (holding action failure effect) that is executed when the hold display is not changed to the advance notice mode, which is an effect in which at least a part of the effect mode is common to the hold action success effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the advance notice effect (or the look-ahead advance notice effect), the active display effect according to the display mode of the active display in the active display area AHA'may be feasible. The active display effect includes, for example, an effect of displaying the active display to be added to the active display area AHA'in the active display area AHA'when the hold display at the time of erasure is in the normal mode (active display effect at the time of addition), or in the normal mode. An effect (active display change effect) for changing the displayed active display to a notice mode (including a change from one notice mode to another notice mode) is included. When the hold change effect and the active display change effect are not particularly distinguished, they may be referred to as "hold change effect".

When the active display effect is feasible, the hold action success effect is executed when the active display is changed to the advance notice mode, and a character or the like is displayed in the display area of the image display device 905 to be active. It may be an effect that acts directly or indirectly. Similarly, the hold action failure effect may be an effect executed when the active display is not changed to the advance notice mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a concealment effect that conceals the hold display in the start winning prize memory display area 905H. The concealment effect is an effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the hold display. For example, in the concealment effect, it is difficult to visually recognize the hold display so that even the number of hold displays displayed in the start winning memory display area 905H cannot be recognized at all (for example, an image for concealment is displayed on the front surface (upper layer). It becomes like a silhouette as a whole and is vague and difficult to see, an image for concealment is displayed on the front and it is difficult to see because it is partially obstructed, and the hold display itself becomes difficult to see (smaller, semi-transparent) It may be an effect that makes it difficult or impossible (for example, an image for concealment is displayed on the front surface and is completely invisible, or is completely invisible due to transparency or non-display). Further, although the number of hold displays displayed in the start winning prize memory display area 905H is somehow recognizable (for example, recognizable by the silhouette), it may be an effect that makes it difficult or impossible to visually recognize each display mode. .. Further, although the display mode is recognizable, it may be an effect that makes it difficult or impossible to visually recognize the number. For example, it may notify the presence or absence of a hold display (for example, a red hold display) in a certain display mode. Further, in the case of the hold display in which the notice mode is expressed not in the whole but in a part (for example, the upper part), it is difficult for the concealment effect to visually recognize the upper part of each hold display displayed in the start winning memory display area 905H. Alternatively, it may be an effect that makes it impossible.

Further, the concealment effect may conceal the active display in the active display area AHA'in place of or in addition to the hold display in the start winning memory display area 905H.

In the present embodiment, as a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, a special symbol indicating the number "3" among the special symbols (special symbols indicating the numbers "3", "5", and "7") that are the jackpot symbols is shown. When the symbol or the special symbol indicating the number "5" is stopped and displayed, it becomes "8R probability variation jackpot" which is one aspect of "big hit". Further, when the special symbol indicating the number "7" is stopped and displayed, it becomes "16R probability variation big hit" which is one aspect of "big hit". After the 16R probability variation jackpot and the 8R probability variation jackpot are completed, the probability variation control (probability fluctuation control) is performed together with the time reduction control (time reduction control).

By performing the probability variation control, the probability that the variable display result becomes a "big hit" in each special figure game is improved so as to be higher than when the probability variation control is not performed. The probability variation control is performed under either a condition of executing a special figure game with a predetermined number of STs (also referred to as a probability variation number) after the end of the jackpot game state, or when the variable display result becomes a "big hit". Ends when is first established. Therefore, even if the variable display result does not become a "big hit" when the probability variation control is performed, the probability variation control is performed when the special figure game of a predetermined number of STs (probability variation number) is digested. finish. The predetermined number of STs is, for example, 70 times.

Further, by performing the time saving control, the variable display time (special figure fluctuation time) of the special symbol in the special figure game is shortened as compared with the case where the time saving control is not performed. The time saving control is when any of the conditions of the execution of the special figure game of a predetermined number of time saving times and the variable display result being "big hit" are satisfied first after the end of the big hit game state. It ends in. Therefore, even if the variable display result does not become a "big hit" when the time saving control is being performed, the time saving control ends when the special figure game of a predetermined number of time saving times is exhausted. The predetermined number of time reductions is, for example, 70 times.

When the time reduction control is performed, the normal symbol display 9020 controls the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (normal symbol fluctuation time) in the normal symbol game to be shorter than when the time reduction control is not performed, or is normal in each normal symbol game. In the normal variable winning ball device 906B based on the control that improves the probability that the variable display result of the symbol becomes "per ordinary figure" compared to the time when the time saving control is not performed, and the variable display result becomes "per ordinary figure". The game ball wins the second start, such as control to make the tilt control time for tilt control of the movable wing piece longer than when time reduction control is not performed, and control to increase the number of tilts compared to when time reduction control is not performed. Control that is advantageous to the player is performed by making it easier to pass (enter) the mouth and increasing the possibility that the second starting condition is satisfied. In this way, the control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening due to the time saving control, which is advantageous for the player, is also called a high opening control. As the high open control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined and performed.

By performing the high opening control, the frequency of the second start winning opening being in the expanded open state is increased as compared with the case where the high opening control is not performed. Therefore, the second start condition for executing the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 904B is easily satisfied, and the second special symbol game can be executed frequently, so that the variable display result is next. Is shortened until it becomes a "big hit". The period during which the high opening control can be executed is also referred to as the high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time reduction control is performed.

The gaming state in which both the time saving control and the high opening control are performed is also referred to as a time saving state or a high base state. In addition, the gaming state in which the probability change control is performed is also referred to as a high probability state or a probability change state. The time saving state (high base state) and the high probability state (probability change state) are examples of advantageous states that are advantageous for the player.

A gaming state in which time reduction control and high opening control are performed together with probability change control, that is, a gaming state that is both a high probability state (probability change state) and a high base state (time reduction state) is a high accuracy high base state or a time reduction probability change state. Also called. A gaming state in which only probability variation control is performed and time reduction control or high opening control is not performed, that is, a gaming state in which a high probability state (probability variation state) but not a high base state (time reduction state) is performed is a high accuracy low base state. Alternatively, it is also called a time-saving uncertain change state. In addition, only the high accuracy and high base state (probability change state with time reduction) may be referred to as "probability change state". A gaming state in which time reduction control or high opening control is performed without probability change control, that is, a gaming state that is not a high probability state (probability change state) but a high base state (time reduction state) is also called a low probability high base state. Will be done. A gaming state in which probabilistic control is not performed and time reduction control or high opening control is not performed, that is, a gaming state that is neither a high probability state (probability change state) nor a high base state (time reduction state) is also called a low probability low base state. Will be done. The low-accuracy low-base state is a normal state in which no probability variation control, time-saving control, or high-opening control is performed. Sometimes referred to as "normal state". The initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 (a state after the initialization process is executed after the power is turned on, for example, when a system reset is performed) is a normal state.

In the present embodiment, even if the variable display result does not become a "big hit" while the probability variation control is being performed, when the special figure game of a predetermined number of STs (probability variation number) is digested. , The probability variation control ends, but the probability variation control may not end until the variable display result becomes a "big hit" without providing the ST number (probability variation number). That is, a probability variation jackpot may be provided to continue the probability variation control until the next jackpot. When a probability variation jackpot that continues the probability variation control until the next jackpot is provided, a normal jackpot that is not performed after the probability variation control may be further provided.

The pachinko gaming machine 901 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 9011, an effect control board 9012, a voice control board 9013, and a lamp control board 9014 as shown in FIG. 44. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 901 is also equipped with a relay board 9015 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 902 of the pachinko game machine 901.

The main board 9011 is a control board on the main side, and is equipped with various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. The main board 9011 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board including a function for setting a random number used in a special figure game, a function for inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 9012. , It has a function to output and transmit a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function to output various information to the hall management computer. Further, the main board 9011 controls lighting / extinguishing of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B to control the lighting / extinguishing of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Variable display of predetermined identification information, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 9020 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring of the normal symbol display 9020. It also has a control function.

On the main board 9011, for example, from a game control microcomputer 90100, a switch circuit 90110 that takes in detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 90100, and a game control microcomputer 90100. A solenoid circuit 90111 or the like that transmits a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 9081 and 9082 is mounted.

The effect control board 9012 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 9011, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015, and receives an image display device 905, a speaker 908, and a lamp. Various circuits for controlling the effect operation by the 909 and the movable accessory 9017 are mounted.

The audio control board 9013 is a control board for audio output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and is for outputting audio from the speaker 908 based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012. It is equipped with a processing circuit that executes audio signal processing. The lamp control board 9014 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and lights / turns off drive of the lamp 909 or the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012. It is equipped with a lamp driver circuit to perform. The accessory control board 9016 is a control board for controlling the operation of the accessory provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and drives the movable accessory 9017 based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012. A circuit that outputs a drive signal is mounted on an actuator (not shown).

As shown in FIG. 44, wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 9021, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, and the count switch 9023 is connected to the main board 9011. The gate switch 9021, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, and the count switch 9023 have an arbitrary configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor. It should be. In addition to the gate switch 9021, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, and the count switch 9023, the game machine 901 also has other switches connected to the main board 9011 (for example, a glass door (not shown)). ) May be provided, a switch for detecting the open / closed state of the game board 902 itself, a switch for detecting an illegal vibration, a switch for detecting an illegal electromagnetic wave). Further, on the main board 9011, the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, the normal symbol display 9020, the first hold display 9025A, the second hold display 9025B, and the normal figure hold display 9025C Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 toward the effect control board 9012 is relayed by the relay board 9015. The control command transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9015 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal.

FIG. 45A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 45A is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the effect control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the effect control command may be one or a plurality of three or more. Good.

The information constituting each effect control command may be stored in the command table in the ROM 90101, for example. When a certain effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the storage address of the effect control command in the above command table is specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer as a setting for transmitting the effect control command. It may be stored in the created buffer area. After that, the command control process (step S9017) of the game control timer interrupt process (FIG. 53) is executed, so that the effect control command set as described above is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012. Is transmitted.

A part of FIG. 45 (A) will be described. For example, the command 8001H is a first variable start command that specifies the start of the first special figure game. The command 8002H is a second variable start command that specifies the start of the second special figure game. The command 81XXH is a variable pattern designation command for designating a variable pattern such as a decorative symbol that is variably displayed in each decorative symbol display area 905L, 905C, 905R corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8CXXXH is a variable display result notification command for notifying a variable display result. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 45 (B), the determination result and the jackpot type of whether the variable display result is "miss", "16R probability variation jackpot", or "8R probability variation jackpot". Different EXT data are set according to the determination result of.

The command B100H is a first start opening winning notification command for notifying that the first starting condition has been satisfied (sometimes referred to as a first starting opening winning designation command or a first starting opening winning command). The command B200H is a second start opening winning notification command for notifying that the second starting condition for executing the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 904B has been satisfied (second starting opening winning designation command). , It may be called a command at the time of winning the second starting port).

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number. For example, when the first start winning is generated (when the number of reserved storages in the first special figure increases), the first holding storage number notification command is transmitted together with the first starting opening winning notification command. Further, when the second start winning is generated (when the second special figure reserved storage number is increased), the second starting opening winning notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command are transmitted.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (commands for designating a winning determination result) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. The command C4XXH is a symbol designation command indicating a determination result of whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" as a winning determination result, and a determination result of the big hit type. Further, the command C6XXH is a variation category designation command (also referred to as "variation category command") indicating a determination result of a variation category (also referred to as "variation pattern type") as a winning determination result. The variation category is a name when the variation patterns of decorative patterns are classified (aggregated) by type. In other words, the variation category is the group name of each group including the variation pattern of one or more decorative symbols categorized into a common group.

In the present embodiment, in the winning random number value determination process (FIG. 57), when the starting winning is generated, the variable category is excluded except in some cases (for example, when the first starting winning is made in a high base state or the like). The fluctuation category is determined based on the random value MR3'for determination. Then, a value corresponding to the determination result is set in the EXT data of the variable category command, and control is performed to transmit the value to the effect control board 9012. The effect control CPU 90120 mounted on the effect control board 9012 super-reachs the variable display based on the start prize based on the value set in the variable category command transmitted from the main board 9011 when the start prize occurs. It is possible to recognize whether or not it becomes.

The game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main board 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 90101 that stores game control programs, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. The RAM (Random Access Memory) 90102 that provides the area, the CPU (Central Processing Unit) 90103 that executes the game control program and performs the control operation, and the numerical data indicating the random value are updated independently of the CPU 90103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 90104 to be performed, and an I / O (Input / Output port) 90105.

FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value that is counted (updated) on the side of the main board 9011. As shown in FIG. 46, in the present embodiment, on the side of the main board 9011, the random number value MR1 ′ for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 ′ for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 ′ for determining the variable category. , Numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR4'for determining the display result of the general map and the random number value MR5'for determining the fluctuation pattern are controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 90104 may be any one that counts numerical data indicating a part or all of the random number values MR1'to MR5'. The CPU 90103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 90104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 90154 shown in FIG. 50, and updates various numerical data by software to update the random number value MR1'. Numerical data indicating a part of ~ MR5'may be counted.

FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a variation category and a variation pattern in the present embodiment. In FIG. 47, the fluctuation category “PA1'” is a shortened / non-reach (loss) fluctuation category. The fluctuation pattern "PA1'-1" belongs to the fluctuation category "PA1'". The variable category "PA2'" is a non-reach (missing) variable category. Fluctuation patterns "PA2'-1" and "PA2'-2" belong to the variation category "PA2'". The variable category "PA3'" is a normal reach (missing) variable category. Fluctuation patterns "PA3'-1" and "PA3'-2" belong to the variation category "PA3'". The fluctuation category "PA4'" is a super reach α (loss) fluctuation category. Fluctuation patterns "PA4'-1" to "PA4'-3" belong to the fluctuation category "PA4'". The fluctuation category "PA5'" is a super reach β (loss) fluctuation category. Fluctuation patterns "PA5'-1" to "PA5'-3" belong to the fluctuation category "PA5'". The variable category "PB1'" is a shortened / reach (big hit) variable category. The fluctuation pattern "PB1'-1" belongs to the fluctuation category "PB1'". The variable category "PB3'" is a normal reach (big hit) variable category. Fluctuation patterns "PB3'-1" and "PB3'-2" belong to the fluctuation category "PB3'". The variable category "PB4'" is a super reach α (big hit) variable category. Fluctuation patterns "PB4'-1" to "PB4'-3" belong to the fluctuation category "PB4'". The variable category "PB5'" is a super reach β (big hit) variable category. Fluctuation patterns "PB5'-1" to "PB5'-3" belong to the fluctuation category "PB5'".

A part of FIG. 47 will be described. For example, the fluctuation pattern "PA3'-1" belonging to the fluctuation category "PA3'" is a normal reach (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. Further, the fluctuation pattern "PA3'-2" is a normal reach (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern "PA4'-1" belonging to the fluctuation category "PA4'" is a super reach α (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern "PA4'-2" is a super reach α (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern "PA4'-3" is a super reach α (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice. The fluctuation pattern "PB3'-1" belonging to the fluctuation category "PB3'" is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. Further, the fluctuation pattern "PB3'-2" is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern "PB1'-1" belonging to the fluctuation category "PB1'-1" is a shortened / reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is shortened as compared with the fluctuation pattern "PB3'-1". The fluctuation pattern "PB4'-1" belonging to the fluctuation category "PB4'" is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern "PB4'-2" is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which a pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern "PB4'-3" is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

FIG. 48 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table stored in the ROM 90101. In the display result determination table 90130 shown in FIG. 48, the special figure display result is displayed as a random number value MR1'for determining the special figure display result before the variable display result (special figure display result) of the special figure game is derived and displayed. A table referenced to make a decision based on In the display result determination table 90130 shown in FIG. 48, the determination values (for determining the special figure display result) assigned to each special figure display result (“big hit”, “loss”) according to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901. The number of random values (values to be compared with MR1') is different. According to the display result determination table 90130 shown in FIG. 48, when the game state is in the high probability state, more determination values are assigned to the “big hit” than in the low probability state. That is, the probability of becoming a "big hit" is higher in the high probability state than in the low probability state.

FIG. 49 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 90131 stored in the ROM 90101. The jackpot type determination table 90131 shown in FIG. 49 is for determining the jackpot type to be selected from a plurality of types when it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" and the jackpot game state is controlled. It is a table referred to for determination based on a random number value MR2'. In the jackpot type determination table 90131 shown in FIG. 49, depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (that is, whether the first special figure game is executed or the second special figure game is executed). (Depending on whether to execute), the number of judgment values (values to be compared with the random number value MR2'for determining the jackpot type) assigned to each jackpot type ("16R probability variation jackpot", "8R probability variation jackpot") It's different. According to the jackpot type determination table 90131 shown in FIG. 49, when the variable special figure is the second special figure (when the second special figure game is executed), it is higher than when the variable special figure is the first special figure. (Compared to when executing the first special figure game), many judgment values are assigned to "16R probability variation jackpot". That is, in the second special figure game, the probability of becoming a "16R probability variation big hit" is higher when the "big hit" is made than in the first special figure game.

Further, the ROM 90101 has a variation category determination table referred to for determining a variation category to any one of a plurality of types, and a variation pattern referred to for determining a variation pattern to any one of a plurality of types. The decision table is stored.

The RAM 90102 holds various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. The RAM 90102 is a backup RAM in which a part or all of the data to be held is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board.

FIG. 50 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a game control data holding area provided in the RAM 90102. The RAM 90102 is provided with a game control data holding area 90150 as shown in FIG. 50, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. The game control data holding area 90150 shown in FIG. 50 includes a first special figure holding storage unit 90151A, a second special figure holding storage unit 90151B, a holding specific information storage unit 90151C, a normal figure holding storage unit 90151D, and a game. It includes a control flag setting unit 90152, a game control timer setting unit 90153, a game control counter setting unit 90154, and a game control buffer setting unit 90155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 90151A stores the hold data (first hold information) of the first special figure game. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 90151A associates the holding number with the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) to the first starting winning opening, and random numbers are generated by the CPU 90103 based on the passage (entry) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating random number values extracted from the circuit 90104 or the like (for example, numerical data indicating random number values MR1'to MR3') is set as pending data, and the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). Remember up to.

The second special figure reservation storage unit 90151B stores the hold data (second hold information) of the second special figure game. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 90151B associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game balls) with the holding number with the second starting winning opening, and random numbers are generated by the CPU 90103 based on the passage (entry) of the game balls. Numerical data indicating random number values extracted from the circuit 90104 or the like (for example, numerical data indicating random number values MR1'to MR3') is set as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). Remember.

The hold specific information storage unit 90151C has a winning order of the entire hold data including the hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 90151A and the hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 90151B ( Hold data based on the occurrence of the first start prize (first hold information) or hold data based on the occurrence of the second start prize (second hold information) in association with the hold number which is the game ball detection order) Stores information indicating whether or not. In the hold specific information storage unit 90151C shown in FIG. 56, "first" indicates that it is the first hold information, and "second" indicates that it is the second hold information.

The Fuzu hold storage unit 90151D stores the hold information of the Fuzu game. For example, the normal map holding storage unit 90151D associates the game ball with the hold number in the order in which it has passed through the passage gate 9041, and determines the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 90104 or the like by the CPU 90103 based on the passage of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4'for use is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 90152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. For example, the game control flag setting unit 90152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 90153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. For example, the game control timer setting unit 90153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 90154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. For example, the game control counter setting unit 90154 receives a first reserved storage number count value and a second special figure reserved storage number, which are stored values of the first reserved storage number counter for counting the first special figure reserved storage number. The second hold storage count value, which is the storage value of the second hold storage counter for counting, the total hold storage count value, which is the storage value of the total hold storage counter for counting the total hold storage number, etc. Be remembered.

The game control buffer setting unit 90155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 90155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The I / O 90105 included in the game control microcomputer 90100 shown in FIG. 44 has an input port for capturing various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 90100 and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100. It is configured to include an output port for transmission.

As shown in FIG. 44, the effect control board 9012 provides an effect control CPU 90120 that performs control operations according to a program, a ROM 90121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area of the effect control CPU 90120. RAM 90122, a display control unit 90123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 905, and a random number that updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the effect control CPU 90120. The circuit 90124, the I / O 90125, and the RTC (real-time clock) circuit 90126 are mounted.

The effect control CPU 90120, ROM 90121, and RAM 90122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 9012.

The effect control board 9012 is used for wiring for transmitting an information signal (video signal) indicating an effect image to the image display device 905 and for transmitting an information signal (effect sound signal) indicating a command to the voice control board 9013. Wiring, wiring for transmitting an information signal (illuminated signal) indicating a command to the lamp control board 9014, and the like are connected. Further, on the effect control board 9012, wiring for transmitting an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that the player's operation action on the stick controller 9031A has been detected from the controller sensor unit 9035A and a game for the push button 9031B A wiring for transmitting an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that a person's operation action has been detected from the push sensor 9035B is also connected.

In the effect control board 9012, for example, a random number circuit 90124 or the like counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values used for controlling the effect operation. The random number used to control such an effect operation is also called an effect random number.

The ROM 90121 mounted on the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. 44 stores various data used for controlling the effect operation in addition to the program for effect control. For example, the ROM 90121 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, etc. prepared for the effect control CPU 90120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings.

Further, the ROM 90121 is provided with a plurality of effect control patterns used by the effect control CPU 90120 to control the effect operation by various effect devices (for example, an image display device 905, a speaker 908, a lamp 909, a movable accessory 9017, etc.). The constituent data is stored. Each effect control pattern is composed of data indicating the control contents of various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. That is, various effect operations are realized by setting the effect control pattern. For example, the variable display operation of the decorative symbol corresponding to each variation pattern is realized by setting the effect control pattern corresponding to each variation pattern. Hold production, active display production, fanfare production, production during round game (opening production, closing production), ending production, etc. are also realized by setting production control patterns corresponding to each production.

FIG. 51 (A) shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. The effect control pattern is a control for controlling various effect operations such as an effect control process timer determination value, display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, movable accessory control data, and end code. It suffices that it is composed of data and the contents of various effect controls, the switching timing of the effect control, and the like are set in chronological order. In addition, the effect control pattern may include, for example, movable member control data that specifies the content of motion control in the movable member provided inside or outside the game area. The effect control process timer judgment value is a value (judgment value) to be compared with the value of the effect control process timer (effect control process timer value) provided in a predetermined area of the effect control RAM built in the effect control microcomputer. Therefore, a determination value corresponding to the execution time (effect time) of each effect operation is set in advance. In addition, instead of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command was received from the main board 11, or a predetermined process was executed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the effect control microcomputer. Data indicating the switching timing of the effect control and the like may be set corresponding to a predetermined control content and processing content.

The display control data includes data indicating a display mode of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 905, such as data indicating a variation mode of each decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the display control data is data that specifies the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 905. The voice control data includes data indicating a voice output mode from the speaker 908, such as data indicating an output mode of an effect sound or the like linked to a variable display operation of the decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the voice control data is data that specifies the voice output operation from the speaker 908. The lamp control data includes, for example, data indicating a light emitting operation mode of the lamp 909. That is, the lamp control data is data that specifies the light emitting operation of the lamp 909. The operation detection control data includes data indicating a period for effectively detecting an operation on an operation unit such as a push button 9031B, a control content of an effect operation when the operation is effectively detected, and the like. That is, the operation detection control data is data that specifies an effect operation according to an operation on the operation unit. The movable accessory control data includes, for example, data indicating an operation mode of the movable accessory 9017. That is, the movable accessory control data is data that specifies the operation of the movable accessory 9017. It should be noted that these control data do not have to be included in all the effect control patterns, and the effect control pattern is configured to include a part of the control data according to the content of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be.

FIG. 51B is a diagram for explaining various effect operations executed according to the contents of the effect control pattern. The effect control CPU 90120 determines the control content of the effect operation according to various control data included in the effect control pattern. For example, when the effect control process timer value matches any of the effect control process timer determination values, the decorative symbol is displayed in the manner specified by the display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination value, and the character is displayed. Control is performed to display an effect image such as an image or a background image on the screen of the image display device 905. In addition, control is performed to output voice from the speaker 908 in the mode specified by the voice control data, and control is performed to emit light of the lamp 909 in the mode specified by the lamp control data. During the valid period (sometimes referred to simply as the valid period), control is performed to accept operations on the stick controller 9031A and the push button 9031B and determine the content of the effect. Dummy data (data for which control is not specified) may be set for the data corresponding to the effect device that is not the control target even if it corresponds to the effect control process timer determination value.

The effect operation shown in FIG. 51 (B) corresponds to the entire period from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the final stop, but is not limited to this, and is in the variable display of the decorative symbol. An effect control pattern for executing the effect operation may be provided corresponding to a part of the period (for example, a period for executing the advance notice effect). Alternatively, in order to execute the effect operation corresponding to a predetermined period other than the variable display of the decorative symbol (for example, a period during which the round is being executed in the jackpot game state, a period during which the ending effect is executed at the end of the jackpot game state, etc.). The effect control pattern may be provided.

When setting the effect control pattern, the pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern may be read from the ROM 90121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122, or the pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern may be temporarily stored. The storage address in the ROM 90121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122, and the reading position of the stored data in the ROM 90121 may be specified. After that, every time the effect control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the effect control process timer determination values, and if it matches, the effect operation corresponding to the corresponding various control data is performed. To control. As described above, the effect control CPU 90120 has the effect device (for example, the image display device 905, the speaker 908, and the lamp) according to the contents of the process data # 1 to the process data # n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern. 909, movable accessory 9017, etc.) are controlled. In each process data # 1 to process data # n, display control data # 1 to display control data # n and voice control data # 1 to voice control associated with the effect control process timer determination values # 1 to # n. Data # n, lamp control data # 1 to lamp control data # n, operation detection control data # 1 to operation detection control data # n, movable accessory control data # 1 to movable accessory control data # n are productions of each. The effect control execution data # 1 to the effect control execution data # n that indicate the control content of the effect operation in the device and specify the execution of the effect control are configured.

A command according to the effect control pattern set in this way is output from the effect control CPU 90120 to the display control unit 90123, the voice control board 9013, the lamp control board 9014, the accessory control board 9016, and the like. For example, in the display control unit 90123 that receives a command from the effect control CPU 90120, for example, a predetermined VDP or the like reads the image data indicated by the command from an image data memory such as CGROM and temporarily stores the image data in the VRAM. Let me. Further, in the voice control board 9013 that receives a command from the effect control CPU 90120, for example, the voice synthesis IC reads the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and temporarily stores the voice data in the voice RAM or the like. ..

FIG. 52A is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area provided in the RAM 90122. The RAM 90122 is provided with an effect control data holding area 90190 as shown in FIG. 52 (A), for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The effect control data holding area 90190 shown in FIG. 52 (A) includes an effect control flag setting unit 90191, an effect control timer setting unit 90192, an effect control counter setting unit 90193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 90194. There is.

The effect control flag setting unit 90191 has a plurality of types capable of updating the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 905 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 90191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 90192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 905. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 90192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit 90193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 90193 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 90194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 90194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the present embodiment, the data constituting the start winning command buffer 90194A as shown in FIG. 52B is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 90194. The start winning command receiver 90194A is provided with a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “8”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “8”) of the total number of reserved storages. When there is a start prize to the 1st start winning opening or the 2nd starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (1st starting opening winning designation command or the 2nd starting opening winning designation command), the symbol designation command, the variable category command , A set of four commands, a hold storage number notification command (first hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command), is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012. A storage area is secured in the start winning command receive command buffer 90194A so that these start opening winning designation commands, symbol designation commands, variable category commands, and hold storage number notification commands can be stored in association with each other.

The effect control CPU 90120 stores the commands in the order received at the time of the start winning from the beginning in the free area of the start winning command buffer 90194A. At the time of starting winning, commands are transmitted in the order of starting opening winning designation command, symbol designation command, variable category command, and hold storage number notification command. Therefore, if the command reception is performed normally, as shown in FIG. 52 (B), the start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, and the variation are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers "1" to "8". It will be stored in the order of category command and hold storage number notification command. The command stored in the start winning command buffer 90194A shown in FIG. 52 (B) is the first storage area (the area corresponding to the buffer number "1") every time the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. It is deleted from what is stored in, and the subsequent stored contents are shifted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the data constituting the pre-reading advance notice buffer 90194B as shown in FIG. 52C is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The read-ahead notice buffer 90194B is provided with a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “8”) corresponding to each data constituting the start winning command buffer 90194A. That is, in the look-ahead notice buffer 90194B, the decision contents regarding the look-ahead notice effect regarding the respective hold information determined by the effect control CPU 90120 and the like are stored in association with the buffer numbers "1" to "8". .. For example, when the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the start winning command buffer 90194A due to the start of variable display of the decorative symbol, the read-ahead notice buffer 90194B , The content associated with the buffer number is also deleted. Further, when the hold data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is shifted to another buffer number in the start winning command buffer 90194A due to the start of variable display of the decorative symbol, etc. In the reading notice buffer 90194B, the content associated with the buffer number is also shifted to the other buffer number.

Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 901 in the present embodiment will be described.

When the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 9011, the game control microcomputer 90100 is started, and the CPU 90103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 90103 sets the interrupt disabled and then performs the necessary initial settings. In this initial setting, for example, RAM 90102 is cleared. In addition, the register of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 90100 is set. As a result, after that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 90103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 90103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process. When the initial setting is completed, interrupts are permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko game machine 901 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed, and then the loop process may be started.

When the CPU 90103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 53. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 53 is started, the CPU 90103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 9021, the first start port switch 9022A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 90110. The state of the detection signals input from various switches such as the switch 9022B and the count switch 9023 is determined (step S9011). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main side error process (including sensor error notification process), an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step). S9012).

Following the process of step S9012, the CPU 90103 executes a predetermined information output process to supply jackpot information, start information, and probability fluctuation information to, for example, a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 901. Data such as is output (step S9013).

Following the information output process in step S9013, the CPU 90103 executes a game random number update process (step S9014). In the game random number update process in step S9014, for example, at least a part of the game random numbers (for example, random number values MR1'to MR5') used on the main board 9011 side is updated by software. As an example, the CPU 90103 may update numerical data indicating a game random number counted by a random counter of the game control counter setting unit 90154 by software.

Following the game random number update process in step S9014, the CPU 90103 executes a special symbol process process (step S9015). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901, and the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol are updated. Various processes are selected and executed in order to control the display operation on the display device 904B and set the opening / closing operation of the large winning opening on the special variable winning ball device 907 according to a predetermined procedure.

Following the special symbol process processing, the CPU 90103 executes the normal symbol process processing (step S9016). By executing the normal symbol process processing, the display operation on the normal symbol display 9020 (for example, turning on and off the segment LED) is controlled, and the variable display of the normal symbol and the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball device 906B It enables the tilting operation setting of.

Following the normal symbol process process, the CPU 90103 executes a command control process to transmit a control command from the main board 9011 to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 9012 (step S9017). As an example, in the command control process, among the output ports included in the I / O 90105, the effect control corresponds to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 90155. After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the board 9012, set the predetermined control data in the output port of the effect control INT signal and turn on the effect control INT signal for a predetermined time. It is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table by turning it off from. After executing the command control process, the interrupt enable state is set, and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process process executed in step S9015 of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 53. In the special symbol process process, the CPU 90103 first executes the start winning determination process (step S90101). FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S90101 of the special symbol process process (step S9015) shown in FIG. 54.

In the start winning determination process (step S90101) shown in FIG. 55, the CPU 90103 first receives a detection signal from the first start opening switch 9022A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 906A. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the first start port switch 9022A is ON (step S90201). When it is determined in step S90201 that the first start port switch 9022A is ON (step S90201; YES), the CPU 90103 has a predetermined number of first special figure hold storage (number of hold of the first special figure game). It is determined whether or not it is the upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step S90202). The CPU 90103 may specify the first special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the first reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 90154.

When it is determined in step S90202 that the number of reserved first special figure is not the upper limit value (step S90202; NO), the CPU 90103 has a storage value (starting) of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 90155. “1” is set in the mouth buffer value) (step S90207). Following the process of step S90207, the CPU 90103 executes the start winning process (FIG. 56) (step S90208), and sets (clears) "0" in the start port buffer value (step S90209).

When it is determined in step S90201 that the first start port switch 9022A is not on (step S90201 (NO)), or when it is determined in step S90202 that the number of reserved first special figures has reached the upper limit. (Step S90202 (YES)), after executing the process of step S90209, the CPU 90103 is from the second start opening switch 9022B provided corresponding to the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 906B. Based on the detection signal, it is determined whether or not the second start port switch 9022B is ON (step S90203). When it is determined in step S90203 that the second start port switch 9022B is on (step S90203; YES), the CPU 90103 has a predetermined number of second special figure hold storage (number of hold of second special figure game). It is determined whether or not it is the upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step S90204). The CPU 90103 may specify the second special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 90154.

When it is determined in step S90204 that the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is not the upper limit value (step S90204; NO), the CPU 90103 uses the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 90155 (start “2” is set in the mouth buffer value) (step S90210). Following the process of step S90210, the CPU 90103 executes the start winning process (FIG. 56) (step S90211), sets (clears) the start port buffer value to "0" (step S90212), and performs the start winning determination process. To finish.

When it is determined in step S90203 that the second start port switch 9022B is not on (step S90203 (NO)), or when it is determined in step S90204 that the number of reserved second special figures has reached the upper limit. (Step S90204 (YES)) ends the start winning determination process without performing the processes of steps S90210, S9021, and S90212.

According to the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 55, even when the first start port switch 9022A and the second start port switch 9022B simultaneously detect the start prize of the game ball, the process based on the respective detections. Can be completed.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning process (step S90208, step S90211). In the start winning process shown in FIG. 56, the CPU 90103 first updates the number of special figure hold storages corresponding to the start port buffer value by 1 (step S90215). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory count value is updated so as to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. Further, the second reserved memory count value is updated so as to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. Following the process of step S90215, the total number of reserved storages is updated to be added by 1 (step S90216). For example, the total hold storage count value, which is the storage value of the total hold storage counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 90154, may be updated to be added by 1.

Following the process of step S90216, the CPU 90103 determines the random number value MR1'for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 90104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 90154. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2'for determination and the random number value MR3' for determining the variation category are extracted (step S90217). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit 90151 corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S90218). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1'to MR3' is set in the first special figure reservation storage unit 90151A, while the start port buffer value is "2". Occasionally, numerical data indicating random values MR1'to MR3' is set in the second special figure reservation storage unit 90151B. Further, the reserved specific information storage unit 90151C stores information according to the start port buffer value.

Following the process of step S90218, the CPU 90103 makes a setting for transmitting the start port winning notification command according to the start port buffer value to the effect control board 9012 (step S90219). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", a setting for transmitting the first start port winning notification command is made. Further, when the start port buffer value is "2", a setting for transmitting the second start port winning notification command is made. The start opening winning notification command set in step S90219 is mainly generated by executing the command control process (step S9017) of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 53, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed. It is transmitted from the board 9011 to the effect control board 9012.

Following the process of step S90219, the CPU 90103 executes a winning random number value determination process (step S90220). After that, the CPU 90103 makes a setting for transmitting the hold storage number notification command (step S90221). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", a setting for transmitting the first hold storage number notification command is made. Further, when the start port buffer value is "2", a setting for transmitting the second hold storage number notification command is made. Then, the process at the time of starting and winning is completed. The hold storage number notification command set in step S90221 is obtained by, for example, executing the command control process (step S9017) of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 53 after the special symbol process process is completed. , Is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the winning random number value determination process (step S90220). In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 57 (A), the CPU 90103 first identifies the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 (step S90401). In the process of step S90401, the CPU 90103 identifies whether or not the game is in the big hit game state by checking the state of the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152. Specifically, the CPU 90103 specifies that it is in the jackpot gaming state when the jackpot flag is on, and specifies that it is not in the jackpot gaming state when the jackpot flag is not in the on state (when it is in the off state). Further, in the process of step S90401, the CPU 90103 identifies whether it is in the high base state or the low base state by checking the state of the high base flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152. Specifically, the CPU 90103 specifies that the high base flag is in the high base state when it is in the on state, and identifies it as the low base state when the high base flag is not in the on state (when it is in the off state). .. Further, in the process of step S90401, the CPU 90103 may specify whether it is in the high accuracy state or the low accuracy state by confirming the state of the high accuracy flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152. Good. Specifically, the CPU 90103 identifies the high-accuracy state when the high-accuracy flag is on, and identifies the low-accuracy state when the high-accuracy flag is not on (when it is off). You may.

The CPU 90103 sets the high base flag to the ON state in the jackpot end process (step S90117). Further, the CPU 90103 clears the high base flag to the off state in the special symbol stop process (step S90113). For example, the CPU 90103 sets an initial value of zero to the fluctuation counter that is compared with the number of time reductions in the jackpot end processing, and updates (counts up) the value of the fluctuation counter when a loss occurs in the special symbol stop processing. At the same time, when the value of the fluctuation counter reaches the number of time reductions, the high base flag is cleared to the off state. Further, the CPU 90103 sets the high accuracy flag to the ON state in the jackpot end processing. Further, the CPU 90103 clears the high accuracy flag to the off state in the special symbol stop processing. For example, the CPU 90103 sets an initial value of zero to the fluctuation counter that is compared with the number of STs in the jackpot end processing, and updates (counts up) the value of the fluctuation counter when a loss occurs in the special symbol stop processing. At the same time, when the value of the fluctuation counter reaches the high probability count, the high probability flag is cleared to the off state. The value of the fluctuation counter is stored in, for example, the game control counter setting unit 90154.

Following the process of step S90401, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not it is currently in the jackpot gaming state (step S90402). That is, it is determined whether or not it is specified that the game is in the big hit game state in the process of step S90401. When it is determined in step S90402 that the game is not in the jackpot gaming state (step S90402; NO), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not it is currently in the high base state (step S90403). That is, it is determined whether or not the high base state is specified in the process of step S90401.

When it is determined in step S90402 that the game is in a big hit game state (step S90402; YES), or when it is determined in step S90403 that it is in a high base state (step S90403; YES), the CPU 90103 determines the start port buffer value. Is determined to be "2" (step S90404). That is, it is determined whether or not it is the second starting prize (starting prize in which the variable special figure is the second special figure). When it is determined in step S90404 that the start port buffer value is not "2" (step S90404; NO), the winning random number value determination process is terminated.

When it is determined in step S90403 that the base state is not high (step S90403 (NO)), or when it is determined in step S90404 that the start port buffer value is "2" (step S90404 (YES)), The CPU 90103 sets (selects) a special figure display result determination table according to the current gaming state (step S90405). Specifically, when the CPU 90103 is not in the high-accuracy state, the table data for the low-accuracy state (values in the range of "8000" to "8329" are "big hits" from the display result determination table 90130 shown in FIG. 48. The table data assigned to the special figure display result is set, and when the high accuracy state is set, the table data for the high accuracy state ("8000" to "8818") is displayed from the display result determination table 90130 shown in FIG. Set the table data assigned to the special figure display result whose range value is "big hit". Note that the CPU 90103 identifies that the high accuracy flag is in the high accuracy state when the high accuracy flag is on, and the high accuracy flag is set. When it is not in the on state (when it is in the off state), it may be specified as a low probability state. Further, a display result determination table different between the first special figure and the second special figure (first special figure display result determination). When using the table, the second special figure display result determination table), if the start port buffer value is "1", the first special figure display result determination table is used, and the start port buffer value is "2". In some cases, the second special figure display result determination table may be used.

Following the process of step S90405, the CPU 90103 has numerical data indicating the random number value MR1'for determining the special figure display result extracted in step S90217 of the start winning process shown in FIG. 56 within a predetermined jackpot determination range. It is determined whether or not (step S90406). For example, the CPU 90103 uses numerical data indicating the random number value MR1'and individual determination values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the special figure display result determination table data set in step S90405 one by one. By comparison, it is determined whether or not there is a determination value that matches the numerical data indicating the random value MR1'. Alternatively, the CPU 90103 performs the minimum value (lower limit) of the determination value assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1'and the special figure display result determination table data set in step S90405. The value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) may be compared to determine whether or not the numerical data indicating the random value MR1'is within the range of the minimum value and the maximum value of the determination value.

When it is determined in step S90406 that it is within the jackpot determination range (step S90406; YES), the random value MR2'for determining the jackpot type extracted in step S90217 of the start winning process shown in FIG. 56 is used. The jackpot type is determined based on the indicated numerical data (step S90407). Specifically, first, the CPU 90103 responds to the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified by the start port buffer value. Set (select) the jackpot type determination table. Specifically, the CPU 90103 sets the table data according to the fluctuation special figure from the jackpot type determination table 90131 shown in FIG. 49. Subsequently, the CPU 90103 compares, for example, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2'for determining the jackpot type with the determination value of each jackpot type in the table data for determining the jackpot type set according to the fluctuation special chart. Then, the jackpot type that matches the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2'may be determined.

Following the process of step S90407, the CPU 90103 makes a setting for transmitting a symbol designation command according to the determination result of the process of step S90407 to the effect control board 9012 (step S90408). On the other hand, when it is determined in step S90406 that it is not within the jackpot determination range (step S90406; NO), a setting is made to transmit a symbol designation command according to the loss to the effect control board 9012 (step). S90409). The symbol designation command set in step S90409 is mainly generated by executing the command control process (step S9017) of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 53 after the special symbol process process is completed. It is transmitted from the board 9011 to the effect control board 9012.

After executing the process of step S90408 or the process of step S90409, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not it is in the high base state (step S90410). When it is determined in step S90410 that the high base state is not present (step S90410; NO), that is, in the scene 1 or the scene 3, the CPU 90103 is for the low base state according to the special figure display result. The variable category determination table is set (selected) (step S90411). On the other hand, when it is determined in step S90410 that the base state is high (step S90410; YES), that is, in the scene 2 or the scene 4, the CPU 90103 is in the high base state according to the special figure display result. The variable category determination table for is set (selected) (step S90412).

FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a selection example of the variable category determination table. FIG. 58 (A) is a selection example in which one of the variable category determination tables is selected from the plurality of variable category determination tables in the low base state. According to FIG. 58 (A), when the special figure display result is “missing” in the low base state, three types of variable category determination tables (“C-TBL1” and “C” in the figure are used according to the number of reserved storages. -TBL2 "" C-TBL3 ")), one of the variable category determination tables is selected. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58 (A), when the number of reserved storages is 0 or 1, the variable category determination table "C-TBL1" is selected, and when the number of reserved storages is 2 or 3. The variable category determination table "C-TBL2" is selected, and when the number of reserved storages is 4 or more, the variable category determination table "C-TBL3" is selected. Further, according to FIG. 58 (A), when the special figure display result is set to "big hit" in the low base state, one type of variable category determination table ("C-TBL4" in the figure) regardless of the number of reserved storages. ) Is selected.

FIG. 58B is a selection example in which one of the variable category determination tables is selected from the plurality of variable category determination tables in the high base state. According to FIG. 58 (B), when the special figure display result is “missing” in the high base state, two types of variable category determination tables (“C-TBL1” and “C” in the figure are used according to the number of reserved storages. -TBL3 "), one of the variable category determination tables is selected. Further, according to FIG. 58 (B), when the special figure display result is set to "big hit" in the high base state, one type of variable category determination table ("C-TBL5" in the figure) regardless of the number of reserved storages. ) Is selected.

FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the variable category determination table. FIG. 59 (A) is the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” shown in the drawings of FIGS. 58 (A) and 58 (B). Variable category determination table "C-TBL1" in FIG. 59 (A) (variable category determination table "C-TBL2" in FIG. 59 (B), variable category determination table "C-TBL3" in FIG. 59 (C), FIG. 59 The variable category determination table "C-TBL4" in (D) and the variable category determination table "C-TBL5" in FIG. 59 (E) are also the numerical values (determined) to be compared with the random number value MR3'for determining the variable category. Values) are assigned to multiple variable categories.

For example, in the setting example of the variable category determination table "C-TBL1" in FIG. 59 (A), 0 out of 100 determination values (values in the range of "0" to "99") of the random value MR3'. Are assigned to the variable category "PA1'", 70 (values in the range "0" to "69") are assigned to the variable category "PA2'", and 27 (values in the range "70" to "96"). Value) is assigned to the variable category "PA3'", two (values in the range "97" to "98") are assigned to the variable category "PA4'", and one (value "99") is assigned to the variable category. It is assigned to "PA5'". That is, in the setting example of the fluctuation category determination table "C-TBL1" in FIG. 59 (A), the fluctuation category "PA1'" is 0% (0 ÷ 100) and the fluctuation category "PA2'" is 70% (70 ÷ 100). ), The variable category "PA3'" is determined by 27% (27 ÷ 100), the variable category "PA4'" is determined by 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the variable category "PA5'" is determined by 1% (1 ÷ 100). Will be done.

The variable category determination table “C-TBL2” shown in FIG. 59 (B), the variable category determination table “C-TBL3” shown in FIG. 59 (C), and the variable category determination table “C” shown in FIG. 59 (D). -TBL4 ”and the variation category determination table“ C-TBL5 ”shown in FIG. 59 (E) are the same, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

Return to FIG. 57 (A). In the process of step S90411 to be executed when it is determined in step S90410 that the state is not in the high base state, the variable category determination table is executed when the CPU 90103 determines in step S90406 that the special figure display result is a "big hit". If the table data constituting "C-TBL4" is set and it is determined that the special figure display result is "missing", the variable category determination table "C-TBL1" to the variable category determination according to the number of reserved storages. Set the table data constituting any one of the tables "C-TBL3". Further, in the process of step S90412 to be executed when it is determined in step S90410 that the high base state is set, if the CPU 90103 determines in step S90406 that the special figure display result is a "big hit", it is a variable category. If the table data constituting the determination table "C-TBL5" is set and it is determined that the special figure display result is "missing", the category determination table "C-TBL1" or the variation is changed according to the number of reserved storages. Set the table data that constitutes any of the category determination table "C-TBL3".

After executing the process of step S90411 or the process of step S90412, the CPU 90103 determines (determines) the variable category based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3'for determining the variable category (step S90413). Specifically, the CPU 90103 has numerical data indicating the random number value MR3'for determining the variation category extracted in step S90217 of the start winning process shown in FIG. 56, and the variation set in step S90411 or step S90412. It may be determined which of the determination values matches the numerical data indicating the random value MR3'by comparing the table data of the category determination table with the determination values assigned to the respective variable categories. Following the process of step S90413, the CPU 90103 transmits one of the variable category commands shown in FIG. 57 (B) to the effect control board 9012 according to the determination result (decision result) of the process of step S90413. (Step S90414), the random value determination process at the time of winning is completed.

Following the start winning determination process (step S90101), the CPU 90103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S90110 to S90117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152. (See FIG. 54).

The special symbol normal process in step S90110 is a process executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. The special symbol normal process includes a process of determining (predetermining) whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" before the variable display result is derived and displayed. In the special symbol normal processing, when the variable display result is determined in advance, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1".

The variation pattern setting process in step S90111 is a process executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. The variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the variation pattern, a setting process for transmitting a variation pattern specification command, a variable display result notification command, a first variation start command (or a second variation start command), and the like. There is. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2".

The special symbol variation process in step S90112 is a process executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. The special symbol variation processing includes processing for varying (variable display) the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, and the elapsed time after the start of the variation is the special symbol variation time (FIG. 47). It includes processing to determine whether or not it has been reached. In the special symbol variation processing, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" when the elapsed time after the start of the variation reaches the special symbol variation time.

The special symbol stop process in step S90113 is a process executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. The special symbol stop process is a process of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B to stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol, and the jackpot flag is turned off. (When it is determined in advance that the variable display result is "missing" in the special symbol normal processing (step S90110)), a processing for transitioning the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 and a jackpot flag Includes a setting process for sending a hit start specification command (fan flag command) as a process to be executed when is on (when it is determined in advance that the variable display result is a "big hit"). .. In the special symbol stop processing, when the jackpot flag is off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and when the jackpot flag is on, the special figure process flag is updated. Update the value of to "4".

The jackpot release pre-processing in step S90114 is a process executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. The jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the big winning opening to open (for example, setting a solenoid drive signal for the solenoid 9082 for the jackpot door to open the big winning opening). , Includes setting processing for sending notification commands such as the opening of the big winning door. In the jackpot opening preprocessing, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5".

The process of opening the jackpot in step S90115 is a process executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. The big hit opening process is large based on whether or not the elapsed time after opening the big winning opening has passed a predetermined time and whether or not the number of game balls detected by the count switch 9023 has reached a predetermined number. For the process of determining the timing to return the winning opening from the open state to the closed state and the setting for closing the large winning opening (for example, the solenoid 9082 for the large winning opening door for closing the large winning opening). It includes processing to set the solenoid drive signal, etc., and setting processing to send a notification command after opening the big winning opening. In the process of opening the jackpot, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6".

The process after opening the jackpot in step S90116 is a process executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. The big hit post-opening process is a process to determine whether the number of executions of the round that opens the big winning opening has reached the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening, or when the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening has not been reached. As a process to be executed, it includes a setting process for sending a notification command during opening of the big winning opening, and a setting process for sending a hit end specification command as a process to be executed when the maximum number of times the winning opening is opened is reached. I'm out. In the jackpot opening post-processing, when the number of rounds executed has not reached the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and when the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening is reached, The value of the special figure process flag is updated to "7".

The jackpot end process in step S90117 is a process executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. The jackpot end process is a process for determining whether or not the jackpot end effect waiting time (waiting time corresponding to the ending effect execution period) has elapsed, and a process to be executed when the jackpot end effect waiting time has elapsed. It includes a process of setting the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 to a high accuracy and high base state, a process of setting the number of STs and the number of time reductions, and the like. In the jackpot end process, when the waiting time corresponding to the execution period of the ending effect elapses, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value.

Further, the big hit opening process (step S90115), the big hit opening post-processing (step S90116), the big hit opening pre-processing (step S90114), and the big hit end processing (step S90117) are big prizes when the count switch 9023 is turned on. Includes send settings for sending oral prize notification commands.

FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol normal processing (step S90110). In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 60, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the total number of pending storages is “0” (step S90230). For example, in the process of step S90230, the total number of reserved memory count values stored in the game control counter setting unit 90154 may be read out, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

When the total number of pending storages is other than "0" in step S90230 (step S90230; NO), whether or not the pending data to be digested first (the first winning pending data) is the second reserved information. Determine (step S90231). For example, in the process of step S90231, whether or not the information stored in the hold specific information storage unit 90151C corresponding to the hold number "1" is the information indicating that it is the second hold information. You just have to judge.

When the hold data first digested in step S90231 is the second hold information (step S90231; YES), the hold stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 90151B corresponding to the hold number "1". As data, the random number value MR1'for determining the special figure display result and the random number value MR2'for determining the jackpot type are read out (step S90232). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step S90232, for example, by subtracting 1 from the second reserved storage number count value and updating, the second special figure reserved storage number is updated to be subtracted by 1, and the second special figure reserved storage is updated. The hold data indicating the random number values MR1'to MR3' stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the part 90151B is raised one entry at a time. (Step S90233). Further, in the process of step S90233, the hold specific information storage unit 90151C shifts the information stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" one entry at a time. Further, in the process of step S90233, the game control counter setting unit 90154 updates the total reserved memory count value stored by the total reserved memory counter to be subtracted by 1. Following the process of step S90233, the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step S90234).

When the hold data first digested in step S90231 is not the second hold information (step S90231; NO), the hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 90151A corresponding to the hold number "1". As a result, the random number value MR1'for determining the special figure display result and the random number value MR2'for determining the jackpot type are read out (step S90236). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step S90236, for example, by subtracting 1 from the first reserved storage number count value and updating, the first special figure reserved storage number is updated to be subtracted by 1, and the first special figure reserved storage is updated. The hold data indicating the random number values MR1'to MR3' stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the part 90151A is higher by one entry. (Step S90237). Further, in the process of step S90237, the hold specific information storage unit 90151C shifts the information stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" one entry at a time. Further, in the process of step S90237, the game control counter setting unit 90154 updates the total reserved memory count value stored by the total reserved memory counter to be subtracted by 1. Following the process of step S90237, the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is updated to "1" (step S90238).

After executing any of the processes of steps S90234 and S90238, the CPU 90103 sets (selects) a special figure display result determination table according to the current gaming state (step S90239). For example, the CPU 90103 may set the special figure display result determination table in the same manner as in step S90405 of the winning random number value determination process (step S90220) shown in FIG. 57 (A). Subsequently, the CPU 90103 uses the special figure based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1'for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for variation and the special figure display result determination table set in step S90239. The display result is determined (step S90240). In the process of step S90240, the CPU 90103 is set with the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1'in step S90239 as in step S90406 of the winning random number value determination process (step S90220) shown in FIG. 57 (A). In the table data for determining the special figure display result, the special figure display result ("big hit" or "missing" is determined by comparing each judgment value assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" one by one. Or) should be decided.

Following the process of step S90240, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the special figure display result determined in step S90240 is a "big hit" (step S90241). If it is determined in step S90241 that it is a "big hit" (step S90241; YES), the CPU 90103 sets the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152 to the ON state (step S90242). The jackpot flag is cleared (reset) to the off state in the jackpot end process of step S90117. Following the process in step S90242, the CPU 90103 executes a jackpot type determination process (S90244). The jackpot type determination process in step S90244 is the same as the jackpot type determination process executed in step S90407 of the winning random number value determination process (step S90220) shown in FIG. 57 (A). Following the jackpot type determination process in step S90244, the CPU 90103 is a storage value of the jackpot type buffer provided in, for example, the game control buffer setting unit 90155, corresponding to the jackpot type determined in the jackpot type determination process in step S90244. The jackpot type buffer value is set (step S90245). That is, what is the jackpot type determined in the jackpot type determination process in step S90244 is stored. As an example, the CPU 90103 sets the jackpot type buffer value to "1" if the jackpot type determined in the jackpot type determination process in step S90244 is "16R probability variation jackpot", and if it is "8R probability variation jackpot", the jackpot type Set the buffer value to "2".

When it is determined in step S90241 that it is not a "big hit" (step S90241 (NO)), or after the process of step S90245 is executed, the CPU 90103 determines the special figure display result determined in the process of step S90240, or In the case of a big hit, a fixed special symbol is set corresponding to the big hit type determined in the process of step S90244 (step S90248). After the finalized special symbol is set in step S90248, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" which is a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S90249), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. ..

When the total number of reserved storages is "0" in step S90230 (step S90230; YES), the demo display setting (step S90250) is executed, and the special symbol normal processing is terminated. In the demo display setting of step S90250, a customer waiting demo designation command for designating a demonstration display (demo screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 905 is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012. On the other hand, it is determined whether or not the transmission has been completed. At this time, if it has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demo specification command is made, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a variation pattern determination table referred to in the variation pattern setting process (step S90111). In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 90103 determines the variation category and the variation pattern corresponding to the determined variation category, as in the process of step S90413 of the winning random number value determination process (step S90220) shown in FIG. 57 (A). The determination table is selected (set), and the variation pattern is determined using the selected variation pattern determination table. For example, when the CPU 90103 determines the variation category "PA2'", the CPU 90103 selects the variation pattern determination table corresponding to the variation category "PA2'" shown in FIG. 61 (B), and a random value for determining the variation pattern. When the numerical data indicating MR5'is in the range of "0" to "39", the fluctuation pattern "PA2'-1" is determined, and when it is in the range of "40" to "99", the fluctuation pattern "PA2'-" 2 ”is decided. Further, for example, when the CPU 103 determines the variation category "PA3'", the CPU 103 selects the variation pattern determination table corresponding to the variation category "PA3'" shown in FIG. 61 (C), and disturbs the variation pattern determination. When the numerical data indicating the numerical value MR5'is in the range of "0" to "79", the fluctuation pattern "PA3'-1" is determined, and when the numerical data is in the range of "80" to "99", the fluctuation pattern "PA3'" is determined. -2 "is decided. The same applies when other variable categories are determined.

According to FIGS. 47, 48, 58, 59, 61 and the like, the relationship between the normal reach and the jackpot expectation of the super reach is super reach β> super reach α> normal reach. Further, in the normal reach, the expectation of a big hit is higher in the case with the pseudo-continuous fluctuation than in the case without the pseudo-continuous fluctuation. In Super Reach α (same for Super Reach β), the expectation of a big hit is higher in the case with pseudo-ream fluctuation than in the case without pseudo-ream fluctuation, and once in the case where the number of pseudo-ream is 2 times. Expectations are higher than in the case.

The random number value MR5'for determining the variation pattern may be extracted at the time of executing the process, or the random value MR3'for determining the variation category may be extracted at the time of starting winning process (step S90208, step S90211). It may be extracted in step S90217 to be reserved data, and may be read out in step S90232 (or step S90236) of the special symbol normal processing (step S90110).

In the present embodiment, the set value of the number of STs (probability variation) and the set value of 70 times are set to the same value (both 70 times), but the set value of the number of STs (probability variation) and the time reduction are set. The number of times may be different from the set value of 70 times. Further, in the present embodiment, the set value of the ST number (probability variation number) in the case of the 8R probability variation jackpot and the set value of the ST number (probability variation number) in the case of the 16R probability variation jackpot are set to the same value (both 70 times). However, the set value of the number of STs (probability variation number) in the case of the 8R probability variation jackpot and the set value of the ST number (probability variation number) in the case of the 16R probability variation jackpot may be different values. Further, in the present embodiment, the set value of the number of time reductions in the case of the 8R probability variation jackpot and the set value of the number of time reductions in the case of the 16R probability variation jackpot are set to the same value (both 70 times), but in the case of the 8R probability variation jackpot. The set value of the number of time reductions in the above and the set value of the number of time reductions in the case of a 16R probability variation jackpot may be different values.

Next, the operation on the effect control board 9012 will be described.

FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control main process. When the effect control board 9012 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 90120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in FIG. 62.

In the effect control main process shown in FIG. 62, the effect control CPU 90120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S9071), clears the RAM 90122, sets various initial values, and mounts the effect control board 9012. Set the register of the CTC (counter / timer circuit). After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is in the ON state (step S9072). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, the CTC register setting. If it is determined that the timer interrupt flag is not in the ON state (step S9072; NO), the process of step S9072 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 9012 side, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command or the like is generated from the main board 9011 in addition to the timer interrupt. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 9011 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 90120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but interrupts when using a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 90120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 90125, a control that becomes an effect control command or the like from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015. Capture the signal.

The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, an effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 90194. As an example, when the effect control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the effect control command reception buffer. After that, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

When it is determined in step S9072 that the timer interrupt flag is in the on state (step S9072; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 clears the timer interrupt flag and turns it off (step S9073). The command analysis process is executed (step S9074). In the command analysis process executed in step S9074, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100 of the main board 9011 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the reading thereof. Settings and controls corresponding to the issued production control commands are performed.

Following the command analysis process in step S9074, the effect control CPU 90120 executes an error notification process (step S9075). In the error notification process of step S9075, for example, an error notification corresponding to a magnetic anomaly notification designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 is performed for an act of illegally guiding the game ball to the winning opening by using a magnet.

Following the error notification process in step S9075, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the effect control process process (step S9076). In the effect control process process of step S9076, various effect devices (for example, image display device 905, speaker 908, lamp 909, movable accessory 9017, etc.) are used based on the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 9011. Judgments, decisions, settings, etc. regarding the existing production operation are performed.

Following the effect control process process in step S9076, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the effect random number update process (step S9077). In the effect random number update process in step S9077, for example, at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 9012 side is updated by software. As an example, the effect control CPU 90120 may update numerical data indicating the effect random numbers counted by the random number of the effect control counter setting unit 90193 by software. After that, the process returns to step S9072.

It has been explained that the interrupt for receiving the effect control command or the like from the main board 9011 on the effect control board 9012 side is an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 9011 is turned on. However, the method of generating an interrupt for receiving an effect control command or the like is not limited to the above. For example, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command or the like may be generated by an interrupt request by the first bit of serial communication.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the command analysis process (step S9074). In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 63, the effect control CPU 90120 first confirms the stored contents of the effect control command reception buffer, and thus receives commands from the main board 9011 transmitted via the relay board 9015. It is determined whether or not there is (step S90501). If it is determined that there is no receive command (step S90501; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 ends the command analysis process.

When it is determined in step S90501 that there is a reception command (step S90501; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the reception command is the first start opening winning notification command (step S90502). .. The effect control CPU 90120 may, for example, check the MODE data of the reception command and specify the type of the reception command (see FIG. 45).

When it is determined in step S90502 that the command is the first start opening winning notification command (step S90502; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 sets the first hold storage number notification waiting time (step S90503). For example, the effect control CPU 90120 may set a preset timer initial value as the reception waiting time of the first hold storage number notification command in the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 90192.

If it is determined in step S90502 that the command is not the first start opening winning notification command (step S90502; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the receiving command is the second starting opening winning notification command. (Step S90504). When it is determined in step S90504 that the command is the second start opening winning notification command (step S90504; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 sets the second hold storage number notification waiting time (step S90505). For example, the effect control CPU 90120 may set a predetermined timer initial value as the reception waiting time of the second hold storage number notification command in the command reception control timer.

If it is determined in step S90504 that the command is not the second start opening winning notification command (step S90504; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the reception command is a symbol designation command (step S90506). ). If it is determined in step S90506 that it is not a symbol designation command (step S90506; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the received command is a variable category command (step S90507). If it is determined in step S90507 that it is not a variable category command (step S90507; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the received command is the first hold storage number notification command (step S90508). ). When it is determined in step S90508 that it is the first hold storage number notification command (step S90508; YES), for example, by initializing the timekeeping operation by the command reception control timer, the first hold storage number notification waiting time Is cleared (step S90509).

If it is determined in step S90508 that it is not the first hold storage number notification command (step S90508; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the reception command is the second hold storage number notification command. (Step S90510). When it is determined in step S90510 that the command is the second hold storage number notification command (step S90510; YES), for example, by initializing the timekeeping operation by the command reception control timer, the second hold storage number notification waiting time is reached. Is cleared (step S90511).

When it is determined in step S90506 that it is a symbol designation command (step S90506 (YES)), when it is determined in step S90507 that it is a variable category command (step S90507 (YES)), step S90503, step S90505, After executing either of the processes of step S90509 and step S90511, the effect control CPU 90120 stores the received command at the beginning of the free area in the start winning command buffer 90194A (step S90512). Following the process of step S90512, the process returns to the process of step S90501.

If it is determined in step S90510 that the reception command is not the second hold storage number notification command (step S90510; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the reception command is a variation pattern specification command. (Step S90513). If it is determined that the command is a variation pattern specification command (step S90513; YES), the effect control CPU 90201 stores the variation pattern specification command in the variation pattern specification command storage area formed in the RAM (step S90515). .. Following the process of step S90515, the process returns to the process of step S90501.

When it is determined in step S90513 that the reception command is not a variation pattern designation command (step S90513; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 makes settings and the like according to the other reception commands (step S90518). For example, when the reception command is a game state designation command, the effect control CPU 90120 may analyze the game state designation command to specify the current game state. Following the process of step S90518, the process returns to the process of step S90501.

FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process process (step S9076). In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 64, the effect control CPU 90120 first executes a winning effect determination process (step S90150). In the winning effect determination process, the effect control CPU 90120 checks the stored contents in the start winning command buffer 90194A, and determines whether or not the start opening winning notification command is received as a reception command. , Processes for determining various effects are executed.

Following the winning effect determination process (step S90150), the effect control CPU 90120 selects any of the processes of steps S90170 to 90177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 90191 or the like. And execute.

The variable display start waiting process in step S90170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”, which is the initial value. The variable display start waiting process displays an image based on whether or not a first fluctuation start command (or a second fluctuation start command), a fluctuation pattern specification command, a variable display result notification command, etc. transmitted from the main board 9011 are received. It includes a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of a decorative pattern in the device 905. In the variable display start waiting process, when it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol is started (that is, when a variable pattern specification command or the like is received), the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1".

The variable display start setting process in step S90171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. The variable display start setting process is a setting for performing variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 905 in response to the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B (for example). , Processing to perform production control patterns corresponding to fluctuation patterns (special figure fluctuation time), setting of fluctuation time timer values, etc., and settings to perform display operations such as hold display and active display (for example, the display operation). It includes processing for setting the effect control pattern corresponding to the above). In the variable display start setting process, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2".

The variable display effect process in step S90172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. The effect processing during variable display is whether or not the variable time timer set in the variable display start setting process (step S90171) has timed out (the elapsed time after the start of variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 905 is the special figure variation time. It includes a process to determine (whether or not it has reached). In the variable display effect processing, when the fluctuation time timer times out, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3".

The special figure hit waiting process in step S90173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. The special figure hit waiting process is a variable game state setting process for setting the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 as a process to be executed when the confirmed decorative symbol is "missing", or when the confirmed decorative symbol is "big hit". The process to be executed includes a process of setting a fanfare effect (for example, setting an effect control pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect). In the special figure hit waiting process, when the final decoration symbol is "missing", the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and when the final decoration symbol is "big hit", the effect process flag is set. Update the value to "4".

The jackpot start process in step S90174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. The jackpot start process is a process of determining whether or not a notification command for opening the big prize opening is received, and a process for executing when a notification command for opening the big winning opening is received (special variable winning in each round). It includes a process of setting (for example, setting an effect control pattern corresponding to an effect during opening) for performing an effect (for example, an effect to be executed when the ball device 907 is in the open state). In the jackpot start process, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "5" when the jackpot opening notification command is received.

The process during the round of step S90175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. During the round, the process is closed as a process to determine whether or not the notification command after opening the big prize opening has been received, and a process to be executed when the notification command after opening the big winning opening is received (special variable winning in each round). It includes a process of setting (for example, setting an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect during closure) for performing an effect (for example, an effect to be executed when the ball device 907 is in the closed state). In the process during the round, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "6" when the notification command is received after the opening of the big winning opening.

The round post-processing in step S90176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. The round post-processing is a process of determining whether or not a large winning opening opening notification command or a winning end designation command has been received, and a processing of opening as a process to be executed when a large winning opening opening notification command is received. Settings (for example, setting the effect control pattern corresponding to the open effect) and settings for performing the ending effect as the process to be executed when the hit end specification command is received (for example, for the ending effect). It includes processing for performing the corresponding effect control pattern, setting the value of the ending effect execution time timer, etc.). In the round post-processing, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "5" when the notification command for opening the big winning opening is received, and the value of the effect process flag is updated to "7" when the hit end specification command is received. To do.

The post-hit process in step S90177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In the post-hit processing, whether the ending effect execution time timer set in the round post-processing (step S90176) has timed out (whether the elapsed time after the start of execution of the ending effect in the image display device 5 has reached the set time). Includes processing to determine (whether or not). In the post-hit processing, when the ending effect execution time timer times out, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0".

FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing an example of the winning effect determination process (S90150). In the winning effect determination process shown in FIG. 65, the effect control CPU 90120 first checks the stored contents in the start winning reception command buffer 90194A (step S90151), and first, as a new reception command, the first start opening winning designation command. Is received (step S90152). When it is determined in step S90152 that the first start opening prize designation command has not been received (step S90152; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 receives the second start opening prize designation command as a new reception command. Whether or not it is determined (step S90154). When it is determined in step S90154 that the second start opening winning designation command has not been received (step S90154; NO), the winning effect determination process ends.

When it is determined in step S90152 that the first start opening winning designation command has been received (step S90152; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 refers to, for example, the high base flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 90191. Then, it is determined whether or not the time is shortened (high accuracy and high base state) (step S90155). When it is determined that the time is not shortened (step S90155: NO), the effect control CPU 90120 executes a hold effect determination process (step S90160). In the process of determining the hold effect, etc. in step S90160 (the same applies to the process of determining the hold effect, etc. in step S90163), there is a process of determining the hold effect, the active display effect, the action effect (hold action failure effect, hold action failure effect, etc.). include. Details will be described later.

After executing the hold effect determination process (step S90160), the effect control CPU 90120 stores the determined content of the hold effect determination process (step S90161). Specifically, for example, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the content of the hold effect determination process in association with the buffer number of the pre-reading advance notice buffer 90194B corresponding to the start prize buffer number in the start winning command buffer 90194A. Remember.

After executing the process of step S90161, the effect control CPU 90120 adds a new hold display to the start winning prize storage display area 905H based on the determination content stored in step S90161 (step S90162). More specifically, the effect control CPU 90120 displays an effect control pattern in the start winning memory display area 905H for holding display according to the display mode at the time of addition stored in association with the buffer number of the pre-reading advance notice buffer 90194B described above. It is determined in the hold effect determination process by setting it as a usage pattern and transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 90123. The hold display displayed in the display mode at the time of addition is added to the start winning memory display area 905H. Then, the production determination process at the time of winning is completed.

When it is determined in step S90154 that the second start opening winning designation command has been received (step S90154; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 refers to, for example, the high base flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 90191. Then, it is determined whether or not the time is shortened (high accuracy and high base state) (step S90156). When it is determined that the time is shortened (high accuracy and high base state) (step S90156: YES), the effect control CPU 90120 executes a hold effect determination process (step S90163). The process of determining the hold effect or the like in step S90163 is the same as the process of determining the hold effect or the like in step S90160.

After executing the hold effect determination process (step S90163), the effect control CPU 90120 executes the processes of step S90163, step S90164, and step S90165, and ends the winning effect determination process. The processes of step S90163, step S90164, and step S90165 are the same as the processes related to the processes of step S90160, step S90161, and step S90162.

When it is determined in step S90155 that the time is shortened (step S90155: YES), or when it is determined in step S90156 that the time is not shortened (step S90156: NO), the hold addition process according to the start opening winning designation is executed. (S90166). Specifically, the effect control CPU 90120 has a normal display mode (display mode at the time of addition and after each shift) as in the case where it is determined not to execute the hold effect in the hold effect determination process (steps S90160, S90163). For example, information indicating white) is stored, and a hold display displayed in a normal display mode is added to the start winning memory display area 905H. Then, the production determination process at the time of winning is completed.

FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process (S90171). In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 66, the effect control CPU 90120 first reads, for example, the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 9011, so that the special figure display result is "missed". It is determined whether or not it is (step S90522).

When it is determined in step S90522 that the special symbol display result is "missing" (step S90522; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 determines the combination of the fixed decorative symbols (final stop symbols) constituting the losing combination (step S90522; YES). Step S90524). As an example, the effect control CPU 90120 has a random number value updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 90193 (for example, a random value for determining a left confirmed symbol, a random value for determining a right confirmed symbol, middle). Numerical data indicating a fixed symbol (random value for determining a fixed symbol, etc.) is extracted, and a predetermined symbol determination table (for example, a left confirmed symbol determination table, a right confirmed symbol determination table, a middle confirmed symbol determination table, etc.) stored in advance in ROM 90121 or the like is extracted. ), Etc., as a combination of the final decorative symbols constituting the loss combination, the decorative symbols that are finally stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are determined.

When it is determined in step S90522 that the special figure display result is not "missing" (step S90522; NO), that is, when the special figure display result is "big hit (16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot)", it is for effect control. The CPU 90120 determines the combination of the fixed decorative symbols constituting the jackpot combination (step S90528). As an example, the effect control CPU 90120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value (for example, a random number value for determining a jackpot confirmation symbol) updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 90193, and ROM 90121. By referring to a predetermined symbol determination table (for example, a jackpot confirmation symbol determination table, etc.) stored in advance in the above, as a combination of the final decorative symbols constituting the jackpot combination, the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R Determine the decorative pattern that will be finally stopped and displayed for each. It should be noted that the effect control CPU 90120 may determine the combination of the fixed decorative symbols constituting the jackpot combination depending on which jackpot type (16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot) is, and whether or not there is a promotion effect. Good.

After executing either the process of step S90524 or the process of step S90528, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the button development effect determination process (step S90529). The button development effect determination process includes a process of determining whether or not the button development effect (described later) is executed, a process of determining the effect mode of the button development effect when it is determined to execute the button development effect, and the like. The details of the button development effect determination process will be described later.

After executing the process of step S90529, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the hold digestion process (step S90530). Specifically, when the hold display displayed at the left end of the start prize memory display area 905H is moved (shifted) to the active display area AHA', and there is another hold display in the start prize memory display area 905H, respectively. Move to the left.

After executing the hold digestion process in step S90530, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the effect control pattern set process (step S90532). For example, the effect control CPU 90120 sets an effect control pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation as a usage pattern. That is, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 as the usage pattern. Further, for example, the effect control CPU 90120 sets an effect control pattern corresponding to the button development effect determined in the button development effect determination process in step S90529 as a usage pattern. That is, when the effect control CPU 90120 determines that the button development effect is to be executed in the button development effect determination process in step S90529, the effect control mode (for example, the button development effect pattern described later) and the like are determined. In the process of step S90532, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect mode of the button development effect determined in the button development effect determination process of step S90529 is set as the usage pattern. As a result, in the variable display effect processing (S90172), the display operation in the display area of the image display device 905 is performed according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command and the determination content of the button development effect determination process (S90532). (See, for example, FIGS. 72-80).

After executing the process of step S90532, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the initial value of the effect control process timer of the process data of the effect control pattern set in step S90532 (step S90534), and starts the effect control process timer (step S90534). Step S90535), the effect device (effect component) such as the image display device 905 is controlled according to the contents of the process data (step S90536). Subsequently, the effect control CPU 90120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time (special figure fluctuation time shown in FIG. 47) specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step S90537).

Subsequently, the effect control CPU 90120 digests the commands stored in the start winning command buffer 90194A (step S90538). Specifically, the effect control CPU 90120 deletes and deletes the commands (1 set) stored in the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands associated with the start winning command buffer 90194A. The commands stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the issued command are shifted while maintaining the winning order. Further, in the process of step S90538, the information stored in the read-ahead notice buffer 90194B provided in the RAM 90122 or the like is also deleted or shifted according to the deletion or shift of the command. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S90539), and then the variable display start setting process ends.

The button development effect will be described in detail below. The button development effect is an effect of changing (developing) an image (button image imitating push button 9031B, stick controller image imitating stick controller 9031A) corresponding to a button or the like (push button 9031B, stick controller 9031A). .. Hereinafter, the image corresponding to the button or the like may be referred to as "button or the like image" or "button or the like display".

The effect control CPU 90120 may change the display mode of an image such as one type of button (for example, change the display mode (display color, display size) of a button image) or one type of button as a button development effect. Equal image is changed to another kind of button etc image (for example, button image is changed to stick controller image).

In the following description, as an image of a button or the like, a small-sized white button image imitating a push button 9031B may be referred to as a "small button (white)" or a "first aspect". Further, a large-sized white button image imitating the push button 9031B may be referred to as a "large button (white)" or a "second aspect". Further, a large-sized red button image imitating the push button 9031B may be referred to as a "large button (red)" or a "third mode". Further, a stick controller image imitating the stick controller 9031A may be referred to as a "stick" or a "fourth aspect".

FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a button development effect category and a button development effect pattern in the present embodiment. The button development effect pattern indicates an effect mode (display mode) of the button development effect. The button development effect category is a name when the button development effect patterns are classified (aggregated) by type. In other words, the button development effect category is a group name of each group including one or more button development effect patterns categorized into a common group.

In FIG. 67, “initial” is the initial display. "Final" is the final display. "Timing 1" is the first timing at which the image such as a button can change. "Timing 2" is the second timing at which the image such as a button can change. "Timing 3" is the third timing at which the image such as a button can change. The "timing 1", "timing 2", and "timing 3" may be different depending on the fluctuation pattern.

Further, in FIG. 67 (the same applies to other figures), “no change” indicates that there is no change in the image such as a button. "Weak change" indicates that there is a one-step change (one-step change) in an image such as a button. Specifically, the "weak change (1st → 2nd)" is a one-step change from the "first mode" to the "second mode", that is, from the "small button (white)" to the "large button (white)". It shows that there is a change to. "Weak change (2nd → 3rd)" is a one-step change from "2nd mode" to "3rd mode", that is, a change from "large button (white)" to "large button (red)". It shows that there is. "Weak change (3rd → 4th)" indicates that there is a one-step change from "third mode" to "fourth mode", that is, a change from "large button (red)" to "stick". ing. "Medium change" indicates that there is a two-step change (two-step change) in the image such as a button. Specifically, the "medium change (1st → 3rd)" is a two-step change from the "first mode" to the "third mode", that is, from the "small button (white)" to the "large button (red)". It shows that there is a change to. "Medium change (2nd → 4th)" indicates that there is a two-step change from "second mode" to "fourth mode", that is, a change from "large button (white)" to "stick". ing. "Strong change" indicates that there is a three-step change (three-step change) in the image such as a button. Specifically, "strong change (1st → 4th)" is a 3-step change from "1st mode" to "4th mode", that is, a change from "small button (white)" to "stick". Indicates that there is.

In FIG. 67, in the button development effect category “BH1”, the “final” is the “first mode (small button (small button)” without changing the image such as the button at any of the three timings (timing 1, 2, 3). White)) ”, which is a button development production category. The button development effect pattern "BH1-1" belongs to the button development effect category "BH1".

In the case of the button development effect pattern "BH1-1", the image of the button or the like does not change at any of the timing 1, timing 2 and timing 3. The first period ("initial", that is, before "timing 1"), the second period ("timing 1" to "timing 2"), and the third period ("timing 2" to "timing 3") are the first. The period 4 (“final”, that is, after “timing 3”) is also the “first mode (small button (white))”.

In the button development production category "BH2", the image of the button or the like changes slightly at any one of the three timings, and the "final" becomes the "second mode (large button (white))". This is a development production category. The button development effect category "BH2" includes a button development effect pattern "BH2-1" with a weak change at timing 1, a button development effect pattern "BH2-2" with a weak change at timing 2, and a weakness at timing 3. The button development production pattern "BH2-3" with a change belongs to it.

For example, in the case of the button development effect pattern "BH2-1", the image of the button or the like changes weakly at the timing 1 and does not change at the timing 2 or the timing 3, so that the image of the button or the like according to the button development effect pattern "BH2-1" changes. , In the first period (before "timing 1"), it becomes "first mode (small button (white))", and in the second period ("timing 1" to "timing 2") and the third period ("timing"). 2 ”to“ Timing 3 ”) and the fourth period (“Timing 3” and later) are “second mode (large button (white))”.

In the button development production category "BH3a", the image of the button or the like changes slightly at any two of the three timings, and the "final" becomes the "third mode (large button (red))". It is a development production category. In the present embodiment, the button development effect category "BH3a" includes a button development effect pattern "BH3a-1" having a weak change at timing 1 and timing 3, and a button development effect pattern having a weak change at timing 2 and timing 3. "BH3a-2" belongs to it.

For example, in the case of the button development effect pattern "BH3a-1", the button image is weakly changed at timing 1 and timing 3 and does not change at timing 2, so that the button image image by the button development effect pattern "BH3a-1" is , In the first period (before "timing 1"), it becomes "first mode (small button (white))", and in the second period ("timing 1" to "timing 2") and the third period ("timing"). 2 ”to“ Timing 3 ”) is the“ second aspect (large button (white)) ”, and in the fourth period (“Timing 3” or later), it is the “third aspect (large button (red))”.

In the button development production category "BH3b", the image of the button or the like changes in the middle at any one of the three timings, and the "final" becomes the "third mode (large button (red))". It is a development production category. The button development effect category "BH3b" includes a button development effect pattern "BH3b-1" having a medium change at timing 1, a button development effect pattern "BH3b-2" with a medium change at timing 2, and a medium change at timing 3. The button development production pattern "BH3b-3" with a change belongs to it.

For example, in the case of the button development effect pattern "BH3b-1", the image of the button or the like changes in the middle at the timing 1 and does not change at the timing 2 or the timing 3, so that the image of the button or the like according to the button development effect pattern "BH3b-1" is , In the first period (before "timing 1"), it becomes "first mode (small button (white))", and in the second period ("timing 1" to "timing 2") and the third period ("timing"). 2 ”to“ Timing 3 ”) and the fourth period (“Timing 3” and later) are “third mode (large button (red))”.

In the button development production category "BH4a", at any two of the three timings, the image of the button etc. changes in the middle at the earlier timing, the image of the button etc. changes slightly at the later timing, and the "final" This is a button development effect category that is the "fourth mode (stick)". In the present embodiment, the button development effect category "BH4a" includes a button development effect pattern "BH4a-1" having a medium change at timing 1 and a weak change at timing 3, a medium change at timing 2, and a weak change at timing 3. There is a button development effect pattern "BH4a-2" to which.

For example, in the case of the button development effect pattern "BH4a-1", the image of the button or the like changes in the middle at the timing 1, weakly changes at the timing 3, and does not change at the timing 2, so that the button development effect pattern "BH4a-1" is used. The image of the button or the like becomes the "first mode (small button (white))" in the first period (before "timing 1"), and becomes the second period ("timing 1" to "timing 2") or the third. In the period ("timing 2" to "timing 3"), it becomes the "third mode (large button (red))", and in the fourth period (after "timing 3"), it becomes the "fourth mode (stick)".

In the button development production category "BH4b", at any two of the three timings, the image of the button etc. changes slightly at the earlier timing, the image of the button etc. changes at the later timing, and the "final" is This is a button development effect category that is the "fourth mode (stick)". In the present embodiment, the button development effect category "BH4b" includes a button development effect pattern "BH4b-1" having a weak change at timing 1 and a medium change at timing 3, a weak change at timing 2, and a medium change at timing 3. There is a button development effect pattern "BH4b-2" to which.

For example, in the case of the button development effect pattern "BH4b-1", the image such as the button changes weakly at the timing 1, medium changes at the timing 3, and does not change at the timing 2, so that the button development effect pattern "BH4a-1" is used. The image such as a button becomes the "first mode (small button (white))" in the first period (before "timing 1"), and becomes the second period ("timing 1" to "timing 2") and the third. In the period (“timing 2” to “timing 3”), it becomes the “second aspect (large button (white))”, and in the fourth period (“timing 3” or later), it becomes the “fourth aspect (stick)”.

In the button development production category "BH4c", the image of the button or the like changes strongly at the timing of any one of the three timings (timing 3 in this embodiment), and the "final" is the "fourth aspect (stick)". It is a button development production category. In the present embodiment, the button development effect category "BH4c" belongs to the button development effect pattern "BH4c-1" which has a strong change at the timing 3.

In the case of the button development effect pattern "BH4c-1", the image of the button or the like changes strongly at the timing 3 and does not change at the timing 1 or the timing 2. Therefore, the image of the button or the like according to the button development effect pattern "BH4a-1" is the first. In the first period (before "timing 1"), the second period ("timing 1" to "timing 2"), and the third period ("timing 2" to "timing 3"), the "first mode (small button)" (White)) ”, and in the fourth period (after“ timing 3 ”), it becomes the“ fourth aspect (stick) ”.

FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing an example of the button development effect determination process (S90529). FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the determination ratio of the button development effect and the like. FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the determination ratio of the button development effect pattern. In FIG. 69 (A) (the same applies to other figures), the fluctuation pattern "PA4'-X" is a fluctuation pattern of super reach α (loss) (specifically, fluctuation patterns "PA4'-1" "" Either "PA4'-2" or "PA4'-3"). The fluctuation pattern "PA5'-X" is a fluctuation pattern of super reach β (loss) (specifically, any one of the fluctuation patterns "PA5'-1", "PA5'-2", and "PA5'-3"). is there. The fluctuation pattern "PB4'-X" is a fluctuation pattern of super reach α (big hit) (specifically, any one of the fluctuation patterns "PB4'-1", "PB4'-2", and "PB4'-3"). is there. The fluctuation pattern "PB5'-X" is a fluctuation pattern of super reach β (big hit) (specifically, any one of the fluctuation patterns "PB5'-1", "PB5'-2", and "PB5'-3"). is there.

In the button development effect determination process shown in FIG. 68, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not to execute the button development effect (S90550). Specifically, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not to execute the button development effect based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 69A. ..

For example, the effect control CPU 90120 determines that the button development effect is executed at a rate of 5% when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern "PA4'-X". For example, the ROM 90121 has a button development effect execution presence / absence determination table for super reach α (loss), which is referred to when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is the fluctuation pattern “PA4'-X”. Numerical values that are stored and compared with the random number value for determining whether or not the button development effect is executed (for example, the random number value updated in the effect random number update process (S9077)) are "no execution" and " It suffices if it is assigned to "executed" at a ratio of 5:95.

Further, for example, the effect control CPU 90120 determines that the button development effect is executed at a rate of 10% when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern "PA5'-X". For example, the ROM 90121 has a button development effect execution presence / absence determination table for super reach β (loss), which is referred to when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is the fluctuation pattern “PA5'-X”. A numerical value that is stored and compared with a random value for determining whether or not to execute the button development effect may be assigned to "without execution" and "with execution" at a ratio of 10:90.

In the effect control CPU 90120, the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is a super reach fluctuation pattern ("PA4'-X", "PA5'-X", "PB4'-X", "PB5'". Button development whenever there is a fluctuation pattern other than (-X ") ("PA1'-X", "PA2'-X", "PA3'-X", "PB1'-X", "PB3'-X") Decide not to perform the production.

According to FIG. 69 (A), when the button development effect is executed, the super reach is always achieved, so that the jackpot expectation is higher when the button development effect is executed than when it is not executed.

In addition, the jackpot expectation when the button development effect is executed in the super reach α in the low probability state is (probability that "executed" in "PB4'-X") x (in the low probability state). Probability of becoming "PB4'-X" at a certain time) / {(Probability of becoming "executed" at "PB4'-X") x (Probability of becoming "PB4'-X" when in a low probability state) It is obtained from + (probability of "execution" in "PA4'-X") x (probability of "PA4'-X" in low probability state)}, and is about 18.5%. The probability of "execution" for "PB4'-X" is 15%, and the probability of "execution" for "PA4'-X" is 5% (FIG. 69 (A)). Further, since the jackpot probability in the low probability state is about 1/199 (see FIG. 48), the probability of becoming "PB4'-X" in the low probability state is (1/199) × (30/100). The probability of becoming "PA4'-X" in the low probability state is (198/199) × (2/100) (see FIGS. 58 and 59). On the other hand, the jackpot expectation when Super Reach α is executed in the low probability state is the probability of becoming "PB4'-X" in the low probability state / (when in the low probability state). It is obtained from the probability of "PB4'-X" + the probability of becoming "PA4'-X" in the low probability state), and is about 7%. From the above, when the button development effect is executed in Super Reach α, the jackpot expectation is higher than when it is not executed.

In addition, when the button development effect is executed in Super Reach β in the low probability state, the jackpot expectation is (probability that "executed" in "PB5'-X") x (in the low probability state). Probability of becoming "PB5'-X" at a certain time) / {(Probability of becoming "executed" at "PB5'-X") x (Probability of becoming "PB5'-X" when in a low probability state) It is obtained from + (probability of becoming "executed" in "PA5'-X") x (probability of becoming "PA5'-X" in a low probability state)}, and is about 50%. The probability of "execution" for "PB5'-X" is 40%, and the probability of "execution" for "PA5'-X" is 10% (FIG. 69 (A)). Further, since the jackpot probability in the low probability state is about 1/199 (see FIG. 48), the probability of becoming "PB5'-X" in the low probability state is (1/199) x (50/100). The probability of becoming "PA5'-X" in the low probability state is (198/199) × (1/100) (see FIGS. 58 and 59). On the other hand, the jackpot expectation when Super Reach β is executed in the low probability state is the probability of becoming "PB5'-X" in the low probability state / (when in the low probability state). It is obtained from the probability of becoming "PB5'-X" + the probability of becoming "PA5'-X" in a low probability state), and is about 20%. From the above, when the button development effect is executed in Super Reach β, the jackpot expectation is higher than when it is not executed.

Return to FIG. 68. After executing the process of step S90550, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not it is determined to execute the button development effect in the process of step S90550 (S90551). If it is determined not to execute the button development effect (step S90551; NO), the button development effect determination process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined to execute the button development effect (step S90551; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 determines the button development effect category (S90552). Specifically, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the button development effect category at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 69 (B) based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command.

For example, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the button development effect category "BH1" at a rate of 30% when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern "PA4'-X", and the button development effect. The category "BH2" is determined at a rate of 20%, the button development effect category "BH3a" is determined at a rate of 20%, the button development effect category "BH3b" is determined at a rate of 10%, and the button development effect category "BH3a" is determined at a rate of 10%. "BH4a" is determined at a rate of 10%, the button development effect category "BH4b" is determined at a rate of 10%, and the button development effect category "BH4c" is determined at a rate of 0%. For example, the ROM 90121 stores a button development effect category determination table for super reach α (loss), which is referred to when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is the fluctuation pattern “PA4'-X”. Then, in the table, the numerical values to be compared with the random number value for determining the button development effect category (for example, the random number value updated by the effect random number update process (S9077)) are "BH1" and "BH2". It suffices that "BH3a", "BH3b", "BH4a", "BH4b" and "BH4c" are assigned at a ratio of 30:20:20:10:10:10:10.

Further, for example, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the button development effect category "BH1" at a rate of 0% when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern "PA5'-X", and the button development The production category "BH2" is determined at a ratio of 30%, the button development production category "BH3a" is determined at a ratio of 20%, the button development production category "BH3b" is determined at a ratio of 20%, and the button development production category is determined. "BH4a" is determined at a rate of 15%, the button development effect category "BH4b" is determined at a rate of 10%, and the button development effect category "BH4c" is determined at a rate of 5%. For example, the ROM 90121 stores a button development effect category determination table for super reach β (loss), which is referred to when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is the fluctuation pattern “PA5'-X”. Then, in the table, the numerical values to be compared with the random value for determining the button development effect category are "BH1", "BH2", "BH3a", "BH3b", "BH4a", "BH4b" and "BH4c". It suffices if they are allotted at a ratio of 0:30:20:20:15: 10: 5.

According to FIG. 69 (B), in the super reach α, the determination ratio of the button development effect category “BH4a” or “BH4b” to the determination ratio of the button development effect category “BH1” or “BH2” is the fluctuation pattern “PB4”. The case of "-X" is higher than the case of the fluctuation pattern "PA4'-X". That is, in the super reach α, when the image such as a button finally changes to the fourth aspect (stick), the first aspect (small button (white)) and the second aspect (large button (white)) Expectations for big hits are higher than when it stops at. Further, in the super reach β, when the determination ratio of the button development effect category "BH4a" or "BH4b" or "BH4c" is the fluctuation pattern "PB5'-X" with respect to the determination ratio of the button development effect category "BH2". Is higher than the case where the fluctuation pattern is "PA5'-X". That is, in the super reach β, the jackpot expectation is higher when the image such as a button finally changes to the fourth mode (stick) than when it stops at the second mode (large button (white)). It was explained that the relationship of jackpot expectation is super reach β> super reach α, but according to FIG. 69 (B), the case where the super reach β is the case is higher than the case where the super reach α is the case. Images such as buttons are likely to change to the fourth aspect in the end. From the above, the jackpot expectation of the fourth aspect (stick)> the jackpot expectation of the third aspect (large button (red))> the jackpot expectation of the second aspect (large button (red))> the first aspect (small button) (White)) is the expected degree of jackpot.

Further, according to FIG. 69 (B), the determination ratio of the button development effect category "BH3b" to the determination ratio of the button development effect category "BH3a" is a variation pattern when the variation pattern "PB4'-X" is used. It is higher than the case of "PA4'-X", and higher in the case of the fluctuation pattern "PB5'-X" than in the case of the fluctuation pattern "PA5'-X". That is, in the case where the "final" becomes the "third mode" due to one middle change (two-step change) (BH3b), the "final" becomes the "third" due to the two weak changes (one-step change). The jackpot expectation is higher than in the case of "aspect" (BH3a).

Further, according to FIG. 69 (B), the determination ratio of the button development effect category "BH4c" to the determination ratio of the button development effect category "BH4a" or "BH4b" is the case where the fluctuation pattern "PB5'-X" is used. This is higher than the case where the fluctuation pattern is "PA5'-X". In other words, when the "final" becomes the "fourth mode" (BH4c) due to one strong change (three-step change), one weak change (one-step change) and one medium change (2). The jackpot expectation is higher than when the "final" becomes the "fourth aspect" (BH4a, BH4b) due to the step change). Further, the determination ratio of the button development effect category "BH4b" with respect to the determination ratio of the button development effect category "BH4a" is the case where the variation pattern "PB4'-X" is the variation pattern "PA4'-X". It is higher than that in the case of the fluctuation pattern "PB5'-X" and higher than the case of the fluctuation pattern "PA5'-X". In other words, when the "final" becomes the "third mode" in the order of weak change (1 step change) and medium change (2 step change) (BH4b), medium change (2 step change) and weak change (2 step change) The jackpot expectation is higher than in the case where the "final" becomes the "third mode" (BH4a) in the order of (one-step change).

Return to FIG. 68. After executing the process of step S90552, the effect control CPU 90120 determines one button development effect pattern belonging to the button development effect category determined in step S90552 (S90553).

For example, when the button development effect category “BH2” is determined in step S90552, in the effect control CPU 90120, as shown in FIG. 70 (B), the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern “BH2”. When it is "PA4'-X" or "PA5'-X", the button development effect pattern "BH2-1" is determined at a rate of 36%, and the button development effect pattern "BH2-2" is determined at a rate of 33%. Then, when the button development effect pattern "BH2-3" is determined at a rate of 31% and the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is the fluctuation pattern "PB4'-X" or "PB5'-X", The button development effect pattern "BH2-1" is determined at a rate of 31%, the button development effect pattern "BH2-2" is determined at a rate of 33%, and the button development effect pattern "BH2-3" is determined at a rate of 36%. To decide with. For example, the ROM 90121 has a button development for super reach (loss), which is referred to when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is the fluctuation pattern "PA4'-X" or "PA5'-X". The effect pattern (BH2-X) determination table is stored, and the table is compared with a random number value for determining the button development effect pattern (for example, a random number value updated in the effect random number update process (S9077)). Numerical values may be assigned to "BH2-1", "BH2-2", and "BH2-3" at a ratio of 36:33:31. Further, the button development effect pattern (BH2) for super reach (big hit), which is referred to when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is the fluctuation pattern "PB4'-X" or "PB5'-X". -X) The determination table is stored, and the numerical values to be compared with the random value for determining the button development effect pattern are 31 in "BH2-1", "BH2-2", and "BH2-3". It suffices if they are assigned at a ratio of: 33: 36.

Further, for example, when the button development effect category "BH3a" is determined in step S90552, the effect control CPU 90120 has the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command as shown in FIG. 70 (C). When it is "PA4'-X" or "PA5'-X", the button development effect pattern "BH3a-1" is determined at a rate of 55%, and the button development effect pattern "BH3a-2" is determined at a rate of 45%. When the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is the fluctuation pattern "PB4'-X" or "PB5'-X", the button development effect pattern "BH3a-1" is determined at a rate of 45%. , Button development effect pattern "BH3a-2" is determined at a rate of 55%. For example, the ROM 121 has a button development for super reach (loss), which is referred to when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern "PA4'-X" or "PA5'-X". The effect pattern (BH3a-X) determination table is stored, and in the table, numerical values to be compared with the random value for determining the button development effect pattern are 55:45 for "BH3a-1" and "BH3a-2". It suffices if it is assigned at the ratio of. Further, the button development effect pattern (BH3a) for super reach (big hit), which is referred to when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is the fluctuation pattern "PB4'-X" or "PB5'-X". -X) The determination table is stored, and a numerical value to be compared with the random value for determining the button development effect pattern is assigned to "BH3a-1" and "BH3a-2" at a ratio of 45:55. It suffices if it is done.

If the button development effect category "BH1" is determined in step S90552, there is only one type of button development effect pattern belonging to the button development effect category "BH1" (button development effect pattern "BH1-1"). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 70 (A), the fluctuation patterns specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command are the fluctuation patterns "PA4'-X", "PA5'-X", "PB4'-X", and "PB5'. In any case of "-X", the button development effect pattern "BH1-1" is determined. Further, when the button development effect category "BH4c" is determined in step S90552, there is only one type of button development effect pattern belonging to the button development effect category "BH4c" (button development effect pattern "BH4c-1"). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 70 (G), the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern "PA4'-X", "PA5'-X", "PB4'-X", "PB5'". In any case of "-X", the button development effect pattern "BH4c-1" is determined.

According to FIG. 70 (B), the determination ratio of the button development effect category "BH2-3" to the determination ratio of the button development effect pattern "BH2-1" is the fluctuation pattern "PB4'-X" or "PB5'-X". Is higher than the case of the fluctuation pattern "PA4'-X" or "PA5'-X". Further, according to FIG. 70 (C), the determination ratio of the button development effect category "BH3a-2" to the determination ratio of the button development effect pattern "BH3a-1" is the fluctuation pattern "PB4'-X" or "PB5'. The case of "-X" is higher than the case of the fluctuation pattern "PA4'-X" or "PA5'-X". The same applies to FIGS. 70 (D) to 70 (F). That is, the jackpot expectation is higher when the change is made at a later timing than when the change is made at an earlier timing.

Return to FIG. 68. After executing the process of step S90553, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the button or the like action effect (simply "action effect" in the figure) (S90554), and ends the button development effect determination process. In the process of step S90554, specifically, the effect control CPU 90120 changes the image such as a button at timings 1 to 3 (“no change”, “weak change”, “medium change”, “strong change”. ), The presence / absence of execution of the button or the like action effect (and the effect mode when the action effect is performed) is determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 69 (C).

In the following description, as the button and other action effects performed on the image display device 905, the effect in which the character appears (character appearance) is referred to as the "weak effect effect", and the effect in which the cannon fires (cannon) is referred to as " A production with a lightning strike (lightning strike) may be referred to as a "strong effect production".

For example, when the change mode of the image such as a button at a certain timing (timing 1 to 3) is "no change", the effect control CPU 90120 sets "no action effect" to 70% as shown in FIG. 69 (C). The "weak effect effect" is determined at a rate of 20%, the "medium effect effect" is determined at a rate of 10%, and the "strong effect effect" is determined at a rate of 0%. For example, the ROM 90121 stores a button-like action effect determination table that is referred to when there is no change, and is compared with a random value for determining the button-like action effect in the table. Numerical values may be assigned to "no action effect", "weak action effect", "medium action effect", and "strong action effect" at a ratio of 70:20: 10: 0.

Further, for example, when the change mode of the image such as a button at a certain timing (timing 1 to 3) is "weak change", the effect control CPU 90120 sets "no action effect" to 20 as shown in FIG. 69 (C). It is determined at a rate of%, "weak effect effect" is determined at a rate of 70%, "medium effect effect" is determined at a rate of 8%, and "strong effect effect" is determined at a rate of 2%. For example, the ROM 90121 stores a table for determining the action effect of a button or the like at the time of a weak change, which is referred to when the change is "weak change", and the table is compared with a random value for determining the action effect such as a button. Numerical values may be assigned to "no action effect", "weak action effect", "medium action effect", and "strong action effect" at a ratio of 20: 70: 8: 2.

That is, in step S90553, for example, when the button development effect pattern "BH4b-1" is determined, the timing 1 is "weak change", the timing 2 is "no change", and the timing 3 is "medium change". However (see FIG. 67), in the process of step S90554, the effect control CPU 90120 determines "no action effect" at a rate of 20% for the action effect such as the button for the "weak change" of the timing 1, and "weak effect". "Direction" is determined at a rate of 70%, "Medium action effect" is determined at a rate of 8%, and "Strong action effect" is determined at a rate of 2%. Further, the effect control CPU 90120 determines "no action effect" at a rate of 70% and "weak effect effect" at a rate of 20% for the action effect such as a button for "no change" at timing 2. The "medium action effect" is determined at a rate of 10%, and the "strong effect effect" is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, the effect control CPU 90120 determines "no action effect" at a rate of 5% and "weak effect effect" at a rate of 20% for the action effect such as a button for the "medium change" of the timing 3. The "medium-action effect" is determined at a rate of 55%, and the "strong-action effect" is determined at a rate of 20%. Further, in step S90553, for example, when the button development effect pattern "BH1-1" is determined, all the timings 1 to 3 are "no change" (see FIG. 67), but in the process of step S90554, The effect control CPU 90120 determines "no action effect" at a rate of 70% and "weak effect effect" at a rate of 20% for the action effects such as buttons for each "no change" at timings 1 to 3. Then, the "medium action effect" is determined at a rate of 10%, and the "strong action effect" is determined at a rate of 0%.

According to FIG. 69 (C), when the action effect of the button or the like (weak action effect, medium action effect, strong action effect) is executed, the image of the button or the like changes (weak change, medium change, etc.) as compared with the case where it is not executed. Easy to change). In addition, when the strong action effect is executed, the image such as a button always changes (weak change, medium change, strong change), and when the medium action effect is executed, it is more than when the weak action effect is executed. Images such as buttons are easily changed (weak change, medium change, strong change). In addition, when the strong action effect is executed, it is more likely to change strongly than when the strong action effect is not executed, and when the medium action effect is executed, it is more likely to change medium than when the medium action effect is not executed. When the weak action effect is executed, it is more likely to change weakly than when the weak action effect is not executed.

As described above, in step S90532 of the variable display start setting process (S90171), the effect control pattern corresponding to the effect mode of the button development effect is also set as the usage pattern, so that the effect control CPU 90120 uses the button development effect. The decision content (for example, (button development effect pattern)) determined in the determination process, the effect mode of the action effect such as the button ("no action effect", "weak effect effect", "medium effect effect" in each of timings 1 to 3, Information that identifies the distinction of the "strong action effect") is stored in the RAM 90122 or the like, and in step S90532 of the variable display start setting process (S90171), the RAM 90122 or the like is referred to, and the effect control corresponding to the effect mode of the button development effect or the like. The pattern may also be set as the pattern to be used.

FIG. 71 (A) is an explanatory diagram illustrating various periods in the button development effect. Before explaining FIG. 71 (A), “T1” to “T14” shown in FIGS. 71 to 80 will be described. "T1" represents the start timing of the fluctuation. “T14” represents the end timing of the fluctuation. "T2" represents the timing of reaching. "T3" represents the timing of development into super reach. Super reach developed from "T3" ends in "T13". That is, "T13" represents the timing at which the super reach result (win / loss, etc.) is displayed (notified).

“T4” represents the timing of starting the display of an image such as a button. Images such as buttons displayed from "T4" are deleted by "T13". That is, "T4" to "T13" are button or the like display periods (button or the like image display period).

“T6” represents “timing 1” in FIG. 67. “T8” represents “timing 2” in FIG. 67. “T10” represents “timing 3” in FIG. 67. “T5” represents the timing of starting execution of the button or the like action effect corresponding to the change or the like (no change, weak change, medium change, strong change) of the button or the like image at the timing 1 (T6). The action effect such as buttons started at "T5" ends at "T6". That is, "T5" to "T6" are execution periods of the button or the like action effect corresponding to the change of the button or the like image at the timing 1. “T7” represents the timing of starting execution of the button or the like action effect corresponding to the change of the button or the like image at the timing 2 (T8). The action effect such as buttons started at "T7" ends at "T8". That is, "T7" to "T8" are execution periods of the button or the like action effect corresponding to the change of the button or the like image at the timing 2. “T9” represents the timing of starting execution of the button or the like action effect corresponding to the change of the button or the like image at the timing 3 (T10). The action effects such as buttons started at "T9" end at "T10". That is, "T9" to "T10" are execution periods of the button or the like action effect corresponding to the change of the button or the like image at the timing 3. In addition, "T11" and "T12" will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 71 (A), a part of the button or the like display period (T4 to T13) (T11 to T13) is the valid period (operation is valid) of the button or the like (push button 9031B, stick controller 9031A). The other period (T4 to T11) is a non-valid period (a period during which the operation is not valid) such as a button. That is, "T11" represents the timing at which the operation of the button or the like becomes effective. During the non-valid period (T4 to T11), a "regulation line" is displayed by superimposing it on an image such as a button as an image for notifying that the non-valid period is in effect. During the valid period (T11 to T13), the "regulation line" is not displayed. That is, the "regulation line" is erased at "T11".

The period (T13 to T14) following the button display period (T4 to T13) is a period for displaying the result (win / loss, etc.). More specifically, if there is no operation during the valid period (T11 to T13), when the valid period ends (T13), the image of the button or the like is deleted and the period following the display period of the button or the like (T13 to T14). ), The result is displayed. On the other hand, if there is an operation during the valid period, the image such as a button is deleted when the operation is performed, and the result is displayed from the time when the operation is performed. If there is an operation during the valid period, the valid period ends when the operation is performed. An effect of displaying an image of a button or the like during the valid period (T11 to T13) and displaying a result (win or lose) after the image of the button or the like is deleted may be referred to as an "operation effect".

Each of FIGS. 71 (B) to 73 (B) is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific flow of button development effect.

(Specific example 1)
FIG. 71B shows the flow of the button development effect in the first embodiment. In Specific Example 1, it is assumed that the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern "PA4'-X". Further, the effect control CPU 90120 determines in the button development effect determination process (S90529) to execute the button development effect (S90550), determines the button development effect category "BH1" (S90552), and determines the button development effect pattern "BH1". -1 ”is determined (S90553), and“ no action effect ”is determined (S90554) for the action effect such as buttons for timing 1 (“no change” in “BH1-1”), and timing 2 (“BH1-1”) is determined. Then, the "weak action effect (character appearance)" is determined for the button action effect for "no change") (S90554), and the "action" for the button action effect for timing 3 ("no change" in "BH1-1"). It is assumed that "no production" has been decided. The determined content is set in step S90532 of the variable display start setting process (S90171), and the button development effect is executed as shown in FIG. 71 (B).

In the case of the button development effect pattern "BH1-1" determined in the specific example 1, the image of the button or the like has the first period (before "timing 1" / T4 to T6) and the second period ("timing 1" to Small buttons (white) for both "Timing 2" / T6 to T8), the third period ("Timing 2" to "Timing 3" / T8 to T10), and the fourth period ("Timing 3" and later / T10 to T13) ) (See FIG. 67), and since the “regulation line” is displayed during the non-valid period (T4 to T11) regardless of the button development effect pattern, FIG. 71 (B) is shown in Specific Example 1. Button development production is executed as shown. Further, in the specific example 1, since the "weak action effect (character appearance)" is determined for the timing 2 (no change), the character appears in "T7" to "T8", but the image such as the button is not changed. (Failure production).

(Specific example 2)
FIG. 72 (A) shows the flow of the button development effect in the second embodiment. In Specific Example 2, the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is assumed to be the variation pattern “PA4'-X". Further, the effect control CPU 90120 determines in the button development effect determination process (S90529) to execute the button development effect (S90550), determines the button development effect category "BH2" (S90552), and determines the button development effect pattern "BH2". -1 ”is determined (S90553), and“ weak effect effect ”is determined for timing 1 (“weak change (1st → 2nd)” in “BH2-1”), and “weak effect effect” is determined (S90554). Regarding the action effect of buttons and the like for 2 (“no change” in “BH2-1”), “no action effect” is determined (S90554), and the action effect of buttons and the like for timing 3 (“no change” in “BH2-1”). It is assumed that the "weak effect production" has been decided. The determined content is set in step S90532 of the variable display start setting process (S90171), and the button development effect is executed as shown in FIG. 72 (A).

In the case of the button development effect pattern "BH2-1" determined in the specific example 2, the image such as the button is the "first mode (small button (white)) in the first period (before" timing 1 "/ T4 to T6). ) ”, And the second period (“Timing 1” to “Timing 2” / T6 to T8), the third period (“Timing 2” to “Timing 3” / T8 to T10), and the fourth period (“Timing 2” to “Timing 3” / T8 to T10) After "Timing 3" / T10 to T13), it becomes "second mode (large button (white))" (see FIG. 67), and any button development effect pattern is during the non-valid period (T4 to T11). In order to display the "regulation line" on the screen, in the specific example 2, the button development effect is executed as shown in FIG. 72 (A). Further, in the specific example 2, since the "weak action effect (character appearance)" is determined for the timing 1 (weak change), the character appears in "T5" to "T6" and the image such as a button is displayed in "T6". The "first mode (small button (white))" is changed to the "second mode (large button (white))" (one-step change) (success production). Further, in the specific example 2, since the "weak action effect (character appearance)" is determined for the timing 3 (no change), the character appears in "T9" to "T10", but the image such as a button is displayed in "T10". Not changed (failure production).

(Specific example 3)
FIG. 72 (B) shows the flow of the button development effect in the specific example 3. In Specific Example 3, the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is assumed to be the variation pattern “PB4 ′ -X”. Further, the effect control CPU 90120 determines in the button development effect determination process (S90529) to execute the button development effect (S90550), determines the button development effect category "BH3a" (S90552), and determines the button development effect pattern "BH3a". -2" is determined (S90553), and "no action effect" is determined for the action effect such as buttons for timing 1 ("no change" in "BH3a-2") (S90554), and timing 2 ("BH3a-2"). Then, "no action effect" is determined for the action effect such as buttons for "weak change (1st → 2nd)" (S90554), and "weak change (2nd → 3rd)" in timing 3 ("BH3a-2"). It is assumed that the "weak action effect" has been decided for the action effect such as buttons on "). The determined content is set in step S90532 of the variable display start setting process (S90171), and the button development effect is executed as shown in FIG. 72 (B).

In the case of the button development effect pattern "BH3a-2" determined in Specific Example 3, the image of the button or the like is the first period (before "timing 1" / T4 to T6) or the second period ("timing 1" to In "timing 2" / T6 to T8), it becomes "first mode (small button (white))", and in the third period ("timing 2" to "timing 3" / T8 to T10), "second mode (large)". Button (white)) ”, and in the fourth period (“Timing 3” and later / T10 to T13), it becomes “third mode (large button (red))” (see FIG. 67), and any button development effect Even if it is a pattern, since the "regulation line" is displayed during the non-valid period (T4 to T11), in the specific example 3, the button development effect is executed as shown in FIG. 72 (B). Further, in the specific example 3, since "no action effect" is determined for the timing 2 (weak change), the image such as a button is displayed in "T8" without the character appearing in "T7" to "T8". The mode (small button (white)) is changed to the "second mode (large button (white))" (one-step change). Further, in the specific example 3, since the "weak action effect (character appearance)" is determined for the timing 3 (weak change), the character appears in "T9" to "T10" and the image such as a button is displayed in "T10". The "second mode (large button (white))" is changed to the "third mode (large button (red))" (one-step change) (success production).

(Specific example 4)
FIG. 73 (A) shows the flow of the button development effect in the specific example 4. In Specific Example 4, it is assumed that the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern “PB5 ′ -X”. Further, the effect control CPU 90120 determines in the button development effect determination process (S90529) to execute the button development effect (S90550), determines the button development effect category "BH4b" (S90552), and determines the button development effect pattern "BH4b". -1 ”is determined (S90553), and“ weak effect effect ”is determined for timing 1 (“weak change (1st → 2nd)” in “BH4b-1”), and “weak effect effect” is determined (S90554). "No action effect" is determined for the action effect such as buttons for 2 ("No change" in "BH4b-1") (S90554), and timing 3 ("Medium change (2nd → 4th)" in "BH4b-1"). It is assumed that the "medium action effect" has been decided for the action effect such as buttons on "). The determined content is set in step S90532 of the variable display start setting process (S90171), and the button development effect is executed as shown in FIG. 73 (A).

In the case of the button development effect pattern "BH4b-1" determined in the specific example 4, the image such as the button is the "first mode (small button (white)) in the first period (before" timing 1 "/ T4 to T6). ) ”, And in the second period (“Timing 1” to “Timing 2” / T6 to T8) and the third period (“Timing 2” to “Timing 3” / T8 to T10), “Second mode (large) Button (white)) ”, and in the fourth period (“Timing 3” and later / T10 to T13), it becomes “fourth mode (stick)” (see FIG. 67), and any button development effect pattern. In order to display the "regulation line" during the non-valid period (T4 to T11), in the specific example 4, the button development effect is executed as shown in FIG. 73 (A). Further, in the specific example 4, since the "weak action effect (character appearance)" is determined for the timing 1 (weak change), the character appears in "T5" to "T6" and the image such as a button is displayed in "T6". The "first mode (small button (white))" is changed to the "second mode (large button (white))" (one-step change) (success production). Further, in the specific example 4, since the "medium action effect (cannon)" was determined for the timing 3 (medium change), the cannon was made to appear in "T9" to "T10", and the image such as a button was displayed in "T10". The second mode (large button (white)) is changed to the "fourth mode (stick)" (two-step change) (success production).

(Specific example 5)
FIG. 73 (B) shows the flow of the button development effect in the specific example 5. In Specific Example 5, the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is assumed to be the variation pattern “PB5 ′ -X”. Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines in the button development effect determination process (S90529) to execute the button development effect (S90550), determines the button development effect category "BH4c" (S90552), and determines the button development effect pattern "BH4c". -1 ”is determined (S90553), and“ no action effect ”is determined (S90554) for the action effect such as buttons for timing 1 (“no change” in “BH4c-1”), and timing 2 (“BH4c-1”” is determined. Then, "no action effect" is determined for the action effect such as buttons for "no change") (S90554), and the action effect such as buttons for timing 3 ("strong change (1st → 4th)" in "BH4c-1"). It is assumed that the "strong action production" has been decided.

In the case of the button development effect pattern "BH4c-1" determined in the specific example 5, the image of the button or the like is the first period (before "timing 1" / T4 to T6) or the second period ("timing 1" to In the "timing 2" / T6 to T8) and the third period ("timing 2" to "timing 3" / T8 to T10), it becomes the "first mode (small button (white))" and the fourth period ("" After "Timing 3" / T10 to T13), it becomes the "fourth mode (stick)" (see FIG. 67), and any button development effect pattern is "regulated" during the non-valid period (T4 to T11). In order to display the "line", in the specific example 5, the button development effect is executed as shown in FIG. 73 (B). Further, in the specific example 5, since the "strong action effect (thunderstorm)" is determined for the timing 3 (strong change), a thunderstorm appears in "T9" to "T10" and an image such as a button is displayed in "T10". The first mode (small button (white)) is changed to the "fourth mode (stick)" (three-step change) (success production).

74 to 80 are diagrams showing an example of display operation in the display area of the image display device 5. In FIGS. 74 to 80, the character C901 is an ally character appearing in Super Reach α and Super Reach β, the character C902 is an enemy character appearing in Super Reach α, and the character C903 is an enemy character appearing in Super Reach β. Is.

74 and 75 show a display operation example of the specific example 3 (T2 or later) shown in FIG. 72 (B). Specifically, FIG. 74 (A) → FIG. 74 (B) → FIG. 74 (C) → FIG. 74 (D) → FIG. 74 (E) → FIG. 74 (F) → FIG. 75 (G) → FIG. 75 ( The transition is as follows: H) → FIG. 75 (I) → FIG. 75 (J) → FIG. 75 (K) → FIG. 75 (L) → FIG. 75 (M). FIG. 74 (A) is a reach scene (T2). FIG. 74 (B) is a scene (T3) in which the super reach α is reached. FIG. 74 (C) is a scene (T4) in which the display of the small button (white) D901 is started. Since it is the non-valid period (T4 to T11), the regulation line K90 is displayed superimposed on the small button (white) D901 in FIG. 74 (C).

FIG. 74 (D) is a scene (T5) in which the execution of the action effect such as a button corresponding to the change or the like (no change, weak change, medium change, strong change) at the timing 1 is started. In the specific example 3, since the action effect such as the button corresponding to the change at the timing 1 is not executed, the display in FIG. 74 (D) is the same as that in FIG. 74 (C) (excluding the operation of the character C901 and the character C902). ing. FIG. 74 (E) is a scene (T6) in which a change or the like at timing 1 is performed. Since there is no change at the timing 1 in the specific example 3, the display in FIG. 74 (E) is the same as that in FIG. 74 (D) (excluding the operations of the characters C901 and C902).

FIG. 74 (F) is a scene (T7) in which the execution of the action effect such as a button corresponding to the change or the like (no change, weak change, medium change, strong change) at the timing 2 is started. In the specific example 3, since the action effect such as the button corresponding to the change at the timing 2 is not executed, the display in FIG. 74 (F) is the same as that in FIG. 74 (E) (excluding the operation of the character C901 and the character C902). ing. FIG. 75 (G) is a scene (T8) in which a change or the like at timing 2 is performed. In Specific Example 3, since the change is weak at the timing 2, in FIG. 75 (G), the small button (white) D901 is changed to the large button (white) D902 (one-step change). Since it is a non-valid period (T4 to T11), in FIG. 75 (G), the regulation line K90 is displayed superimposed on the large button (white) D902.

FIG. 75 (H) is a scene (T9) in which the execution of the action effect such as a button corresponding to the change or the like (no change, weak change, medium change, strong change) at the timing 3 is started. In the specific example 3, the weak action effect (character appearance) is executed as the action effect such as a button corresponding to the change at the timing 3, and therefore, in FIG. 75 (H), the character JS (the code "JS" is not used) as the weak action effect. The image JS901 prayed by the figure (the same applies hereinafter) is displayed. FIG. 75 (I) is a scene (T10) in which a change or the like at timing 3 is performed. In Specific Example 3, since the change is weak at the timing 3, in FIG. 75 (I), the large button (white) D902 is changed to the large button (red) D903 (one-step change). Since it is a non-valid period (T4 to T11), in FIG. 75 (I), the regulation line K90 is displayed superimposed on the large button (red) D903. Further, in FIG. 75 (I), the image JS902 that the character JS is pleased with is also displayed.

FIG. 75 (J) is a scene (T11) in which the operation corresponding to the large button (red) D903 (operation of the push button 9031B) is enabled. Since the validity period (T11 to T13) has expired, the regulation line K90 is not displayed in FIG. 75 (J). FIG. 75 (K) is a scene (T12) immediately after FIG. 75 (J). In order to encourage the player to operate the push button 9031B, the large button (red) D903 displayed at the lower right of the display area in FIG. 75 (J) is displayed as the large button (red) D903U in FIG. 75 (K). It is displayed large in the center of the area. In addition, in FIG. 75 (K), information (gauge, numerical value) for notifying the amount of the remaining valid period may be displayed. The same applies to FIGS. 77 (K), 78 (E), 79 (E), and 80 (E). In FIG. 72 (B), the position of T12 is shown away from the position of T11 for convenience of illustration. The same applies to other figures such as FIG. 71 (B).

FIG. 75 (L) shows a scene when the player operates the push button 9031B during the valid period (T11 to T13), or the player pushes during the valid period (T11 to T13). This is a scene (T13) when the valid period ends when the button 9031B is not operated. In Specific Example 3, since it is a big hit, the ally character C901 wins. That is, as a result of the operation (operation of the push button 9031B) corresponding to the large button (red) D903 (large button (red) D903U), the victory or defeat (winning of the character C901) is notified. In FIG. 75 (L), T13 is described as a case where the player does not operate the push button 9031B. The same applies to other figures. FIG. 75 (M) is a scene (T14) at which the variable display ends. Immediately after FIG. 75 (M), a fanfare effect is executed.

76 and 77 show a display operation example of the specific example 4 (T2 or later) shown in FIG. 73 (A). Specifically, FIG. 76 (A) → FIG. 76 (B) → FIG. 76 (C) → FIG. 76 (D) → FIG. 76 (E) → FIG. 76 (F) → FIG. 77 (G) → FIG. 77 ( The transition is as follows: H) → FIG. 77 (I) → FIG. 77 (J) → FIG. 77 (K) → FIG. 77 (L) → FIG. 77 (M). FIG. 76 (A) is a reach scene (T2). FIG. 76 (B) is a scene (T3) in which the super reach β is reached. FIG. 76 (C) is a scene (T4) in which the display of the small button (white) D901 is started. Since it is the non-valid period (T4 to T11), the regulation line K90 is displayed superimposed on the small button (white) D901 in FIG. 76 (C).

FIG. 76 (D) is a scene (T5) in which the execution of the action effect such as a button corresponding to the change or the like (no change, weak change, medium change, strong change) at the timing 1 is started. In the specific example 4, the weak action effect (character appearance) is executed as the action effect such as a button corresponding to the change at the timing 1, and therefore, in FIG. 76 (D), the image JS901 prayed by the character JS is displayed as the weak effect effect. ing. FIG. 76 (E) is a scene (T6) in which a change or the like at timing 1 is performed. In Specific Example 4, since the change is weak at the timing 1, in FIG. 76 (E), the small button (white) D901 is changed to the large button (white) D902 (one-step change). Since it is the non-valid period (T4 to T11), in FIG. 76 (E), the regulation line K90 is displayed superimposed on the large button (white) D902. Further, in FIG. 76 (E), the image JS902 that the character JS is pleased with is also displayed.

FIG. 76 (F) is a scene (T7) in which the execution of the action effect such as a button corresponding to the change or the like (no change, weak change, medium change, strong change) at the timing 2 is started. In the specific example 4, since the action effect of the button or the like corresponding to the change at the timing 2 is not executed, the display in FIG. 76 (F) is the same as that in FIG. ing. FIG. 77 (G) is a scene (T8) in which a change or the like at timing 2 is performed. In Specific Example 4, since there is no change at the timing 2, in FIG. 77 (G), the display is the same as in FIG. 76 (F) (excluding the operations of the characters C901 and C903).

FIG. 77 (H) is a scene (T9) in which the execution of the action effect such as a button corresponding to the change or the like (no change, weak change, medium change, strong change) at the timing 3 is started. In the specific example 4, since the medium action effect (cannon) is executed as the action effect such as a button corresponding to the change at the timing 3, in FIG. 77 (H), the image TS901 of the cannon is displayed as the medium action effect. FIG. 77 (I) is a scene (T10) in which a change or the like at timing 3 is performed. In Specific Example 4, the large button (white) D902 is changed to the stick D904 (two-step change) in FIG. 77 (I) because the change is medium at the timing 3. Since it is a non-valid period (T4 to T11), in FIG. 77 (I), the regulation line K90 is displayed superimposed on the stick D904. Further, in FIG. 77 (I), the image TS902 of the firing smoke and the image TS903 of the impact at the time of hitting are also displayed. If there is no change in the medium action effect (that is, if it is a failure effect), for example, it may not be fired, or it may not be hit even if it is fired.

FIG. 77 (J) is a scene (T11) in which the operation corresponding to the stick D904 (the operation of the stick controller 9031A) is enabled. Since the validity period (T11 to T13) has been reached, the regulation line K90 is not displayed in FIG. 77 (J). FIG. 77 (K) is a scene (T12) immediately after FIG. 77 (J). In order to encourage the player to operate the stick controller 9031A, the stick D904 displayed at the lower right of the display area in FIG. 77 (J) is displayed large as the stick D904U in FIG. 77 (K) in the center of the display area. ing.

FIG. 77 (L) shows a scene when the player operates the stick controller 9031A during the valid period (T11 to T13), or the player sticks during the valid period (T11 to T13). This is a scene (T13) when the valid period ends when the controller 9031A is not operated. In the specific example 4, since it is a big hit, the ally character C901 wins. That is, as a result of the operation corresponding to the stick D904 (stick D904U) (operation of the stick controller 9031A), the victory or defeat (winning of the character C901) is notified. FIG. 77 (M) is a scene (T14) at which the variable display ends. Immediately after FIG. 77 (M), a fanfare effect is executed.

FIG. 78 shows a display operation example of the specific example 1 (T8 or later) shown in FIG. 71 (B). Specifically, the transition is as follows: FIG. 78 (A) → FIG. 78 (B) → FIG. 78 (C) → FIG. 78 (D) → FIG. 78 (E) → FIG. 78 (F) → FIG. 78 (G). To do. FIG. 78 (A) is a scene (T8) in which a change or the like at timing 2 is performed. Since there is no change in the timing 2 in the specific example 1, in FIG. 78 (A), the small button (white) D901 is displayed as in the case of the timing 1 and later. Since it is a non-valid period (T4 to T11), in FIG. 78 (A), the regulation line K90 is displayed superimposed on the small button (white) D901. In Specific Example 1, a weak action effect (character appearance) is executed as an action effect such as a button corresponding to a change or the like (no change, weak change, medium change, strong change) at timing 2, but the change at timing 2 is In FIG. 78 (A), the image JS902 that the character JS is pleased with is not displayed because there is no such thing (that is, because it is a failure effect).

FIG. 78 (B) is a scene (T9) in which the execution of the action effect such as a button corresponding to the change at the timing 3 is started. In the specific example 1, since the action effect such as the button corresponding to the change at the timing 3 is not executed, the display in FIG. 78 (B) is the same as that in FIG. 78 (A) (excluding the operation of the character C901 and the character C902). ing. FIG. 78 (C) is a scene (T10) in which a change or the like at timing 3 is performed. Since there is no change in the timing 3 in the specific example 1, the display in FIG. 78 (C) is the same as that in FIG. 78 (B) (excluding the operations of the characters C901 and C902).

FIG. 78 (D) is a scene (T11) in which the operation corresponding to the small button (white) D901 (the operation of the push button 9031B) is enabled. Since the valid period (T11 to T13) has been reached, the regulation line K90 is not displayed in FIG. 78 (D). FIG. 78 (E) is a scene (T12) immediately after FIG. 78 (D). In order to encourage the player to operate the push button 9031B, the small button (white) D901 displayed at the lower right of the display area in FIG. 78 (D) is displayed as the small button (white) D901U in FIG. 78 (E). It is displayed large in the center of the area.

FIG. 78 (F) shows a scene when the player operates the push button 9031B during the valid period (T11 to T13), or the player pushes during the valid period (T11 to T13). This is a scene (T13) when the valid period ends when the button 9031B is not operated. In Specific Example 1, the enemy character C902 has won because it is lost. That is, as a result of the operation (operation of the push button 9031B) corresponding to the small button (white) D901 (small button (white) D901U), the victory or defeat (winning of the character C902) is notified. FIG. 78 (G) is a scene (T14) at which the variable display ends. Immediately after FIG. 78 (G), the following variable display is executed.

FIG. 79 shows a display operation example of the specific example 2 (T8 or later) shown in FIG. 72 (A). Specifically, the transition is as follows: FIG. 79 (A) → FIG. 79 (B) → FIG. 79 (C) → FIG. 79 (D) → FIG. 79 (E) → FIG. 79 (F) → FIG. 79 (G). To do. FIG. 79 (A) is a scene (T8) in which a change or the like at timing 2 is performed. Since there is no change in the timing 2 in the specific example 2, in FIG. 79 (A), the large button (white) D902 is displayed as in the case of the timing 1 and later. Since it is the non-valid period (T4 to T11), in FIG. 79 (A), the regulation line K is displayed superimposed on the large button (white) D902.

FIG. 79 (B) is a scene (T9) in which the execution of the action effect such as a button corresponding to the change at the timing 3 is started. In the specific example 2, since the weak action effect (character appearance) is executed as the action effect such as a button corresponding to the change at the timing 3, in FIG. 79 (B), the image JS901 prayed by the character JS is displayed as the weak effect effect. ing. FIG. 79 (C) is a scene (T10) in which a change or the like at timing 3 is performed. In Specific Example 2, since there is no change at the timing 3, in FIG. 79 (C), the display is the same as in FIG. 79 (B) (excluding the operations of the characters C901 and C902). Since this is a failure effect, the image JS902 that the character JS is pleased with is not displayed in FIG. 79 (C).

FIG. 79 (D) is a scene (T11) in which the operation corresponding to the large button (white) D902 (operation of the push button 9031B) is enabled. Since the validity period (T11 to T13) has expired, the regulation line K90 is not displayed in FIG. 79 (D). FIG. 79 (E) is a scene (T12) immediately after FIG. 79 (D). In order to encourage the player to operate the push button 9031B, the large button (white) D902 displayed at the lower right of the display area in FIG. 79 (D) is displayed as the large button (white) D902U in FIG. 79 (E). It is displayed large in the center of the area.

FIG. 79 (F) shows a scene when the player operates the push button 9031B during the valid period (T11 to T13), or the player pushes during the valid period (T11 to T13). This is a scene (T13) when the valid period ends when the button 9031B is not operated. In Specific Example 2, the enemy character C902 wins because it is lost. That is, as a result of the operation (operation of the push button 9031B) corresponding to the large button (white) D902 (large button (white) D902U), the victory or defeat (winning of the character C902) is notified. FIG. 79 (G) is a scene (T14) at which the variable display ends. Immediately after FIG. 79 (G), the following variable display is executed.

FIG. 80 shows a display operation example of the specific example 5 (T8 or later) shown in FIG. 73 (B). Specifically, the transition is as follows: FIG. 80 (A) → FIG. 80 (B) → FIG. 80 (C) → FIG. 80 (D) → FIG. 80 (E) → FIG. 80 (F) → FIG. 80 (G). To do. FIG. 80 (A) is a scene (T8) in which a change or the like at timing 2 is performed. Since there is no change at the timing 2 in the specific example 2, the small button (white) D1 is displayed in FIG. 80 (A) as in the case of the timing 1 and thereafter. Since it is a non-valid period (T4 to T11), in FIG. 80 (A), the regulation line K is displayed superimposed on the small button (white) D1.

FIG. 80B is a scene (T9) in which the execution of the action effect such as a button corresponding to the change at the timing 3 is started. In Specific Example 5, a strong action effect (thunderstorm) is executed as a button action effect corresponding to a change at the timing 3, and therefore, in FIG. 80B, a thunderstorm image KS901 is displayed as a strong effect effect. FIG. 80 (C) is a scene (T10) in which a change or the like at timing 3 is performed. In Specific Example 5, since the change is strong at the timing 3, the small button (white) D901 is changed to the stick D904 (change in three steps) in FIG. 80 (C). Since it is a non-valid period (T4 to T11), the regulation line K90 is displayed superimposed on the stick D904 in FIG. 80 (C). Further, in FIG. 80C, an image of lightning bolt KS902 and an image of impact at the time of hit KS903 are also displayed. According to FIG. 69 (C), a change is always performed in the strong effect effect, but when there is no change in the strong effect effect (that is, in the case of a failure effect), for example, there is no lightning strike or there is a lightning strike. You may not hit.

80 (D) to 80 (G) are the same as those of FIGS. 77 (J) to 77 (M), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

As the operations during the valid period (T11 to T13), the player may be requested to perform a continuous striking operation (described later) or a long press operation (described later). Further, during the valid period (T11 to T13), the auto button and the automatic continuous striking function described below may be enabled.

(About auto button and auto repeated hits)
Next, the auto button will be described. The effect control CPU 90120 is for setting, for example, whether to enable or disable the function of the auto button (described later) before executing the effect determination process (S90150) at the time of winning of the effect control process process (S9076). You may execute the auto button setting process of. That is, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the auto button setting process in the effect control process process (S9076), subsequently executes the winning effect determination process (S90150), and subsequently executes the effect control flag setting unit 90191 and the like. Any of the processes of steps S90170 to 90177 can be selected and executed according to the value of the effect process flag provided in. The auto button setting process may be executed regardless of the value of the effect process flag. For example, the auto button setting process is performed after the winning effect determination process (S90150) is executed in the effect control process process (S9076). The process may be executed, or the auto button setting process may be executed before the effect control process process (S9076) is executed in the effect control main process (FIG. 62).

In the following description, the button notice effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, and the notice display is based on the detection of a single operation or a continuous hit operation of a button or the like (push button 9031B, stick controller 9031A) in the button notice effect. Shall be displayed. The "single-shot operation" means that the button or the like is operated once, and the "continuous hit operation" means that the button or the like is continuously operated a plurality of times.

The button advance notice effect is the above-mentioned button development effect, and displays the result of super reach (win / loss, etc.) based on the detection of a single operation or repeated hit operation of a button or the like during the button development effect (during the valid period). You may.

Further, the "auto button" is a function of executing processing assuming that the buttons or the like are actually operated, although the buttons or the like (push button 9031B, stick controller 9031A) are not actually operated by the player. Is. That is, when the function of the auto button is enabled, even if the button or the like is not operated, the process is executed assuming that the button or the like is operated once or repeatedly, and the notice display is displayed.

In addition, "automatic continuous hitting" means that the player actually continuously operates the buttons and the like (for example, long press of the push button 9031B, long press of the stick controller 9031A, etc.) "long press" and long press without distinction. Although it is sometimes referred to as a "push operation"), the button or the like is continuously operated multiple times (for example, the push button 9031B is repeatedly hit, the stick controller 9031A is continuously pulled, etc.). It is a function to detect as. That is, when the automatic continuous striking function is enabled, even if the button or the like is not continuously operated a plurality of times, the process is executed assuming that the button or the like is repeatedly striking and the notice display is displayed. To do.

Further, the button notice effect may be one type, but may be a plurality of types. Hereinafter, as a plurality of types of button notice effects, button notice effects A, button notice effects B, and button notice effects C) are prepared. For example, when the valid period of the button advance notice effect A and the button advance notice effect B is started, a gauge display according to the number of operations of the push button 9031B is displayed, and each time the operation of the push button 9031B is detected, the gauge display is displayed. The display is updated so that the scale of is reduced by one, and when the number of times the operation is detected reaches a predetermined number (that is, when the scale of the gauge display becomes 0), it is determined that the operation condition is satisfied. It is like displaying a notice display (for example, a character string such as "super heat!" Or "chance!"). Further, for example, when the operation of the push button 9031B is detected once during the valid period, the button notice effect C determines that the operation condition is satisfied and displays a notice display (for example, character A or character B). It's like doing.

In the following description, apart from the button notice effect, a back button notice effect that causes the light emitting member 909CC or the like to emit light in a predetermined manner is provided based on the fact that the operation of the button or the like is detected during the valid period. To do. In the button notice effect, when the valid period is started, a notification is given to indicate that the operation is valid or to prompt the operation, while in the back button notice effect, the valid period (hereinafter, valid in the button notice effect). Even if the special validity period is started to distinguish it from the period), the notification indicating that the operation is valid or prompting the operation is not performed. Therefore, there is a way to enjoy the back button notice effect by finding out the special validity period and executing it. Due to such characteristics of the back button notice effect, in the present embodiment, even when the auto button function is enabled, if the operation of the button or the like is not detected during the special valid period, the back button notice is given. It is configured so that the light emitting member 909CC or the like is not controlled to emit light in a predetermined mode by the effect.

In the present embodiment, the auto button setting process is executed at an arbitrary timing (for example, a period during which the demo screen is displayed, a period during which the decorative symbol is variablely displayed, or a period during which the jackpot game is in progress). It is possible to set whether to enable or disable the auto button function based on the operation of the button or the like. Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the auto button setting by the auto button setting process, the auto button can be set from the setting menu (menu screen in which the background image, volume, brightness, etc. can be set). And. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the automatic continuous hitting function is always effective, but like the auto button function, it may be possible to set whether to enable or disable it.

FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing an example of the auto button setting process. In FIG. 81 (the same applies to FIGS. 82 and 83), the operation of the push button 9031B will be described as the operation of the buttons and the like, but the same applies to the stick controller 9031A.

In the auto button setting process, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the auto button enable flag indicating that the auto button function is valid is set (step S907101).

When it is determined that the auto button valid flag is not set (step S907101; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 is set with the operation valid period flag indicating that the operation in the button notice effect is in the valid period. It is confirmed whether or not it is (step S907102). If the flag is set during the operation valid period (step S907102; YES), the auto button setting process ends.

When it is determined that the flag is not set during the operation valid period (step S907102; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the long press operation of the push button 9031B is detected (step S907103). .. If the long press operation of the push button 9031B is not detected (step S907103; NO), the auto button setting process ends. Regarding whether or not the long press operation of the push button 9031B is detected, for example, in the timer interrupt, the operation detection flag is set when the pressing operation of the push button 9031B is detected, and the operation is detected if the pressing operation is not detected. When the flag is configured to be reset, the operation detection flag is set, and the state of detecting the pressing operation of the push button 9031B continues for a predetermined period, it is determined that the long press operation is detected. You may do so.

When the long press operation of the push button is detected (step S907103; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 sets the auto button enable flag (step S907104).

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the image display device 5 to display an auto button valid display indicating that the auto button function is valid (step S907105). Further, the effect control CPU 90120 controls to output an auto button effective sound effect indicating that the auto button function is effective (step S907106). Further, the effect control CPU 90120 has an auto button function effectively set, which is different from the normal light emitting mode (for example, emitting white light) of the push button LED (LED provided in the push button 9031B). Is controlled to emit light according to a special light emitting mode (for example, emitting red light) to notify the above (step S907107).

When it is determined that the auto button valid flag is set (step S907101; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 has a special operation valid period flag indicating that the operation in the back button notice effect is in the valid period. It is confirmed whether or not it is set (step S907108). If the flag is set during the special operation valid period (step S907108; YES), the auto button setting process ends.

If it is determined that the flag is not set during the special operation valid period (step S907108; NO), is the effect control CPU 90120 set with the setting menu display flag indicating that the setting menu is being displayed? It is confirmed whether or not (step S907109), and if it is set (step S907109); YES), the auto button setting process ends.

When the setting menu display flag is not set (step S907109; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the push button 9031B pressing operation (single operation) is detected (step S907110). If the pressing operation (single operation) of the push button 9031B is not detected, the auto button setting process ends.

When the pressing operation (single-shot operation) of the push button 9031B is detected (step S907110; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 resets the auto button enable flag (step S907111).

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the image display device 905 to display the auto button invalid display indicating that the auto button function is invalid (step S907112). Further, the effect control CPU 90120 controls to output an auto button invalid sound effect (sound effect different from the above auto button effective sound effect) indicating that the function of the auto button is invalid (step S907113). Further, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the push button LED to emit light in a normal light emitting mode (step S907114).

Although the auto button setting process has been described above with reference to FIG. 81, the auto button function can be enabled or disabled at an arbitrary timing by executing the auto button setting process shown in FIG. 81. Specifically, the player can enable the auto button function by pressing and holding the push button 9031B when the auto button function is disabled (see steps S907101, S907103, and S907104). ), When the push button 9031B is pressed (single operation) while the auto button function is enabled, the auto button function can be disabled (see steps S907101, S907110, and S907111). With such a configuration, it is possible to easily change the setting of the auto button function not only during the period when the demo screen is displayed, but also during the period when the decorative pattern is variablely displayed and during the big hit game. it can. That is, the setting of the auto button function can be easily changed without interrupting the game once, and it is possible to prevent the interruption from deteriorating the interest.

However, in the present embodiment, an exceptional period is provided in which the setting change of the auto button function is not accepted. For example, when the auto button function is disabled, a long press operation may be performed to display the notice display during the valid period in the button notice effect, but the auto button function responds to this long press operation. If the setting of is changed, the setting change is not intended by the player. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the long press operation of the push button 9031B is detected during the valid period of the operation in the button notice effect (that is, when the operation valid period flag is set), the auto button It is configured not to change the function from disabled to enabled (see step S907102). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting of the auto button function from being unintentionally changed.

It should be noted that, during the valid period of the operation in the back button notice effect, or based on the detection of the decision button effect (pressing operation (single operation) of the push button 9031B during the valid period), a hit / fail display indicating whether or not the hit is a big hit is displayed. Since the predetermined control is performed based on the detection of the pressing operation (single-shot operation) during the valid period in the effect (the effect of displaying), the player does not need to perform the long-pressing operation. However, since it is assumed that the intention to perform a single operation will result in a long press operation, during the valid period of the operation in the back button notice effect (that is, when the special operation valid period flag is set). Also, during the valid period of the operation in the fixed button effect (when the flag is set during the valid period of the fixed button effect operation indicating that the operation in the fixed button effect is valid), the push button 9031B is pressed and held. Even if an operation is detected, the function of the auto button may be configured not to be changed from disabled to enabled. Similarly, a single operation of the push button 9031B may be performed to change the background image setting or the auto button setting from the displayed setting menu, but as a result, a long press operation is performed with the intention of performing the single operation. Therefore, even if the push button 9031B is detected for a long time while the setting menu is being displayed (that is, when the setting menu display flag is set), the auto button function is activated. It may be configured not to change from invalid to valid.

Further, in the present embodiment, even when the auto button function is enabled, the push button 9031B must be pressed in order to execute the back button notice effect. ing. Therefore, an operation for executing the back button notice effect may be performed during the valid period of the operation in the back button notice effect. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the pressing operation of the push button 9031B is detected during the valid period of the operation in the back button notice effect (that is, when the flag during the special operation valid period is set), the auto button is displayed. It is configured not to change the function of the above from valid to invalid (see step S907108). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting of the auto button function from being unintentionally changed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the push button 9031B may be pressed in order to change the background image setting or the auto button setting from the setting menu. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the pressing operation of the push button 9031B is detected while the setting menu is being displayed (that is, when the setting menu display flag is set), the function of the auto button is disabled from being enabled. It is configured not to change to (see step S907109). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting of the auto button function from being unintentionally changed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the button advance notice effect is started when the auto button function is enabled, and when the player operates the push button 9031B in response to the button advance notice effect, the auto button is activated. The function of is changed from valid to invalid (for example, realized by the processing of steps S907101 and S907108 to S907111), but in addition to the function of the auto button being changed from valid to invalid, the detection result of the operation May be reflected in the button notice effect. With such a configuration, even if the auto button function is enabled, if the player wants to perform an operation, the operation can be immediately reflected in the production.

When the player operates the push button 9031B in response to the button advance notice effect started when the auto button function is enabled, the auto button function is changed from enabled to disabled. Instead of the configuration, for example, the auto button function setting may not be changed during the execution of the button advance effect, and the auto button function may be changed from enabled to disabled after the button advance effect is completed. Good. A configuration for changing the function of the auto button from valid to invalid after the button notice effect is completed can be realized, for example, by executing the following processing. When the effect control CPU 90120 detects the operation of the push button 9031B in step S907110, it executes the processes of steps S907111 to S907114 if it is not during the valid period of the button advance notice effect, and enables the auto button function during the valid period. The process of setting the auto button change hold flag indicating that the change to invalid is suspended is executed, and the auto button setting process is terminated without executing the processes of steps S907111 to S907114. Then, if the auto button change hold flag is set at the end of the button notice effect (for example, the timing when the notice display is displayed or the end timing of the valid period), the effect control CPU 90120 has the function of the auto button. Change from enabled to disabled (ie, reset the auto button enable flag and reset the auto button change hold flag). For the configuration in which the auto button function is changed from valid to invalid after the button notice effect is completed (configuration in which the setting change of the auto button function is temporarily suspended), the push button 9031B is repeatedly pressed. Of the button notice effect A and the button notice effect B in which the notice display is displayed based on the detection, and the button notice effect C in which the notice display is displayed based on the detection of the single operation of the push button 9031B. It may be applied to only one of the above, or to both.

Further, when the player operates the push button 9031B in response to the button advance notice effect, the auto button function may be changed from valid to invalid after the button advance notice effect is completed. In addition to the fact that the operation of the push button 9031B is detected at predetermined intervals by the function, the player may detect that the push button 9031B is actually operated and reflect it in the effect. That is, the continuous striking operation by the auto button and the actually performed operation may be reflected in the effect. In such a configuration, for example, when the auto button change hold flag is set, the value of the operation count counter (the effect is performed according to the value) is updated at predetermined intervals by the function of the auto button. In addition, it is realized by updating the value of the operation count counter according to the operation of the push button 9031B.

Further, for example, when the push button 9031B is configured to be deformable and the push button 9031B is deformed into a shape different from the normal state according to a predetermined effect (that is, the effect accompanied by the deformation of the push button 9031B is being executed. Even if the pressing operation of the push button 9031B is detected, the setting of the auto button may not be changed. For example, when the operation is strongly urged by deforming the push button 9031B, it is possible that there is no intention of changing the setting even if the operation is performed. When the push button 9031B is deformed into a shape different from the normal state, for example, the button portion is deformed to a state of protruding toward the player side from the normal state, or the push button 9031B is combined in the normal state. In addition to the case where the button part is split, the case where a plurality of button part parts are combined to form one button part, and the like, it is rotatable (for example, about the rotation axis in the vertical direction). It also includes the case where the button portion that is rotatable or rotatable about the horizontal rotation axis is rotating.

Next, a display mode when the auto button function is enabled or disabled will be described. FIG. 82 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a display mode when the function of the auto button is set to be enabled or disabled. In FIG. 82, the mode of the display screen changes in the order of (1), (2), and (3). In the case of FIG. 82 (1), it is assumed that the auto button function is disabled.

As shown in FIG. 82 (1), when the player presses and holds the push button 9031B while the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed, the auto button is displayed as shown in FIG. 82 (2). Is enabled, and a character string such as "auto button enabled" is displayed on the image display device 905 to indicate that the auto button function is enabled. At this time, in addition to controlling the output of the auto button effective sound effect from the speaker 908, the push button 9031B is controlled to emit light in a special light emitting mode (see steps S907103 to S907107).

Further, if the push button 9031B is pressed (single-shot operation) by the player while the auto button function is enabled, the auto button function is invalid as shown in FIG. 82 (3). At the same time, a character string such as "auto button invalid" is displayed on the image display device 905, and a display indicating that the auto button function is disabled is displayed. At this time, in addition to the control of outputting the auto button invalid sound effect from the speaker 908, the control of causing the push button 9031B to emit light in the normal light emitting mode is performed (see steps S90710 to S907114).

In the example of FIG. 82, the setting of the auto button function is changed during the variable display of the decorative symbol, but in the present embodiment, the same operation is performed not only during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The setting of the auto button function can be changed even during the demo screen display period and the jackpot game period.

Next, the difference between the case where the automatic continuous hitting is performed by the long press operation and the case where the automatic continuous hitting is performed by the auto button function will be described. FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram showing a comparative example of automatic continuous striking by a long press operation and auto continuous striking by an auto button function. It should be noted that, in the automatic continuous hitting by the long press operation during the valid period, the continuous hit determination is turned on after the predetermined start waiting period elapses after the long pressing operation of the push button 9031B is started, but the start waiting period is the button notice effect. It may be different depending on the type. In the description of FIG. 83, it is assumed that the start waiting period of the button notice effect A is 4 seconds and the start waiting period of the button notice effect A is 2 seconds. In the example shown in FIG. 83, it is assumed that the execution of the button notice effect A is determined.

Regarding the button notice effect A, when the automatic continuous striking by the long press operation is performed after the start of the valid period, as shown in FIG. 83 (A), the start standby is performed after the long press operation of the push button 9031B is started. After the period (4 seconds) has elapsed, the continuous hit judgment is turned on (that is, the process is executed assuming that the continuous hit operation has been performed after 4 seconds of the long press operation, and the scale of the gauge display is reduced. I will go).

On the other hand, with respect to the button notice effect A, when the auto button function is used for automatic continuous striking, as shown in FIG. 83 (B), the continuous striking determination is turned on immediately after the start of the valid period (that is,). Immediately after the start of the valid period, the process is executed assuming that the repeated hitting operation has been performed, and the scale of the gauge display decreases). With such a configuration, when the auto button function is enabled and the long press operation is not performed, and when the auto button function is disabled and the long press operation is performed, the effect (for example, the scale of the gauge display is reduced). ) Can be executed at different timings, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, regarding the button notice effect B, when the automatic continuous hitting is performed by the long press operation after the start of the valid period, although not shown, the start waiting period (2) after the long press operation of the push button 9031B is started. After 2 seconds have passed, the continuous hit judgment is turned on (that is, the process is executed assuming that the continuous hit operation has been performed 2 seconds after the long press operation, and the gauge display scale is reduced), and the button notice is given. Regarding the effect B, when the auto button function is used for automatic continuous hitting, the continuous hitting determination is turned on immediately after the start of the valid period. That is, in both cases of the button notice effect A and B, the effect is produced when the auto button function is valid and the long press operation is not performed, and when the auto button function is invalid and the long press operation is performed. (For example, reduction of the gauge display scale) is configured to be executed at different timings.

Although the embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the device configuration, the data structure, the processing shown in the flowchart, the image display operation in the image display device 905, and the like are arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Is possible.

For example, in the above embodiment, the display start timing of the button or the like image (“initial” in FIG. 67) is after the development of super reach (see FIG. 71 (A)), but the display start timing of the button or the like image is It may be before the development of super reach or during the development of super reach. Further, in the above embodiment, the change timing of the image such as a button (“timing 1”, “timing 2”, “timing 3” in FIG. 67) was after the development of super reach (see FIG. 71 (A)). , Buttons, etc. The change timing of the image may be before the development of the super reach or at the time of the development of the super reach.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern of super reach with pseudo-continuous fluctuation ("PA4'-2", "PA4'-3", "PA5'-2", "PA5'-3", "PB4'-2", "PB4" In all or part of the fluctuation patterns of "-3", "PB5'-2", "PB5'-3"), temporary stop display and revariable display are performed after the super reach is reached. You may.

Further, the button development effect may be executed (display of an image such as a button) over a plurality of variable displays (or revariable displays) in the pseudo-continuous variation. As an example, when the fluctuation pattern "PB4'-2" progresses in the order of variable display start → reach → first temporary stop display and revariable display → development to super reach β → final stop display. The display and change timing of images such as buttons in the fluctuation pattern "PB4'-2" ("initial", "timing 1", "timing 2", "timing 3" in FIG. 67) are, for example, "initial" before reach. Assuming that the period between the reach and the first temporary stop display is "timing 1", the period between the first temporary stop display and the revariable display is "timing 2", and the period after the revariable display is "timing 3". Good. Therefore, when the button development effect pattern "BH3a-1" is determined in the fluctuation pattern "PB4'-2", the variable display start → small button (white) is displayed ("initial") → reach → large button ( Change to white) (timing 1) → first temporary stop display → no change (timing 2) → revariable display → change to large button (red) (timing 3) → final stop display. As another example, the fluctuation pattern "PB5'-3" starts variable display → reach → first temporary stop display and revariable display → evolves into super reach β → second temporary stop display and revariable display → final In the case of progress such as stop display, the display and change timing of images such as buttons in the fluctuation pattern "PB5'-3" are set to "initial" between reach and the first temporary stop display, for example. "Timing 1" is set between the first temporary stop display and the re-variable display, and "timing 2" is set between the development of Super Reach β and the second temporary stop display after the second re-variable display. It may be "timing 3". Therefore, when the button development effect pattern "BH3a-1" is determined in the fluctuation pattern "PB5'-3", the variable display start → reach → small button (white) is displayed (“initial”) → the first time. Temporary stop display → Change to large button (white) (timing 1) → re-variable display → develop to super reach β → no change (timing 2) → second temporary stop display → re-variable display → large button (red) Change (timing 3) → final stop display.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the variable display of a certain variable display is started, whether or not the button development effect is executed is determined based on the variable display variation pattern of the variable display (FIGS. 66, 68, 69 (FIGS. 66, 68, 69). A)), you may decide whether or not to execute the button development effect at other timings. For example, when there is a start prize, it may be determined whether or not to execute the button development effect based on the variable category or the like. In addition, at other timings (for example, at the time of starting winning, etc.), in addition to whether or not the button development effect is executed, the effect mode of the button development effect (button development effect pattern, etc.) and the effect mode of the button or the like action effect may be determined. Good.

When determining whether or not to execute the button development effect, the effect mode of the button development effect (button development effect pattern, etc.), and the effect mode of the action effect such as the button when there is a start prize, the button is before the variable display related to the start prize. The button development effect may be started during the variable display related to the start prize without starting the development effect, or the button development effect may be started before the variable display related to the start prize.

If the button development effect is started before the variable display related to the start prize (so-called pre-reading to execute the button development effect), the button development effect is immediately started (displays an image such as a button) at the start prize. Alternatively, the button development effect may be started at the start of the variable display corresponding to the prize before the start prize (when the hold display is shifted), or during the variable display corresponding to the prize before the start prize (when the hold display is shifted). The button development effect may be started before the reach or after the reach). The period from the start of the button development effect during the look-ahead period (when the display of the button or the like display starts) to the predetermined timing of the variable display related to the start winning prize (for example, T13 in FIG. 71) is the button or the like display period. is there.

Further, in the above embodiment, the button action effect (weak effect effect, medium effect effect, strong effect effect) is suddenly executed without any warning (for example, as shown in FIG. 75 (H), the image JS901 shows. Suddenly displayed, the image TS901 is suddenly displayed as shown in FIG. 77 (H), the image KS901 is suddenly displayed as shown in FIG. 80 (B), etc.), for example, the jackpot expectation is high or the jackpot is high. A notice effect for notifying that the image is controlled to the game state (for example, a character drop effect for dropping the movable accessory 9017 to a position in the center of the display area of the image display device 905, a cut-in effect for cutting in the image, etc. A button or the like action effect may be executed by executing a countdown effect (such as a countdown effect for displaying a number). Specifically, at least, there may be a case where the action effect such as a button is executed by executing the notice effect and a case where the action effect such as a button is executed without executing the notice effect (notice effect). Is executed, but it may or may not be present when the action effect such as a button is not executed). It should be noted that the ratio of whether the image such as a button changes depending on whether the action effect such as a button is executed by executing the advance notice effect or the action effect such as a button is executed without executing the advance notice effect. Or, the ratio of which button or the like changes to the image may be different.

Further, in the above embodiment, the degree of expectation of a big hit differs depending on the type of display such as a button (“small button (white)”, “large button (white)”, “large button (red)”, “stick”). (See FIG. 69 (B)), the degree of expectation of a 16R probability variation jackpot may differ depending on the type of display such as a button. Specifically, for example, the determination ratio of the button development effect category may be different depending on the jackpot type (see FIG. 49). Further, when a normal jackpot is provided in addition to the probability variation jackpot as the jackpot type, the degree of expectation of the probability variation jackpot may differ depending on the type of display such as a button.

(A1) As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 901 according to the embodiment of the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and is a detecting means capable of detecting the movement of the player (for example, push button 9031B, stick controller 9031A). Etc.) and a specific display corresponding to the detection means (for example, small button (white) D901, large button (white) D902, large button (red) D903, stick D904 shown in FIGS. 67 and 74 to 80. Specific display execution means (for example, button development effect processing (S90529), variable display during effect process (S90172)) that performs a small button (white) D901U, a large button (white) D902U, a large button (red) D903U, a stick D904U, etc. Etc.), and the specific display executing means has, as the specific display, a first specific display (for example, a small button (white) D901 or the like) and an advantage for the player (for example) over the first specific display. , Expectation of big hit, expectation of 16R probability variation jackpot (see FIG. 49), expectation of probability variation jackpot when there are normal jackpot and probability variation jackpot) High second specific display (for example, small button for first specific display) When the (white) D901 is used, the second specific display is the large button (white) D902, the large button (red) D903, the stick D904, etc., and when the first specific display is the large button (white) D902, the second is The specific display can display a large button (red) D903, stick D904, etc., and when the first specific display is a large button (red) D903, the second specific display can display stick D904, etc.), and the first specific display can be displayed. Is displayed, and then the second specific display can be displayed by executing the action effect (for example, the weak action effect, the medium action effect, and the strong action effect shown in FIG. 69 (C)) that act on the specific display. (For example, after displaying the small button (white) D901 as shown in FIG. 76 (C), the image JS901 acting on the small button (white) D901 as shown in FIGS. 76 (D) and 76 (E) The large button (white) D902 can be displayed as shown in FIG. 76 (E) by executing the weak effect effect for displaying the image JS902, and the large button (white) D902 can be displayed as shown in FIG. 76 (E). After the display, as shown in FIGS. 77 (H) and 77 (I), the medium action effect of displaying the image TS901, the image TS902, and the image TS903 acting on the large button (white) D902 is executed, so that FIG. 77 As shown in (I), the stick D904 can be displayed, etc.).

According to the above configuration, the effect of production is improved. For example, by changing the specific display depending on the action effect, the effect is easy to understand and the effect is improved.

(A2) The gaming machine according to (A1) has the above-mentioned action after displaying the first specific display during the non-effective period of detection by the detection means (for example, T4 to T11 shown in FIGS. 71 to 80). When the effect is executed, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, after displaying the large button (white) D902 as shown in FIG. 76 (E), FIG. 77 (H) or Large button (white) as shown in FIG. 77 (I) The large button (white) as shown in FIG. 77 (I) is formed by executing the medium action effect of displaying the image TS901, the image TS902, and the image TS903 acting on the D902. (White) D902 is changed to stick D904), and in the valid period of detection by the detection means (for example, T11 to T13 shown in FIGS. 71 to 80), the second specific display (for example, FIG. 77 (J)). And the operation effect using the stick D904, the stick D904U, etc. as shown in FIG. 77 (K) (for example, the operation is prompted as shown in FIG. 77 (K) and the result is obtained as shown in FIG. 77 (L). The effect of notifying, etc.) is executed.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation before the validity period.

(A3) In the gaming machine of the above (A1) or (A2), there are a plurality of types of the action effects (for example, the weak action effect, the medium action effect, the strong action effect, etc. shown in FIG. 69C). The rate of change to the second specific display differs depending on which of the action effects is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 69 (C), there is no change and there is a change (weak change, medium). Since the determination ratios of the weak action effect, the medium action effect, and the strong action effect are different in the case of (change or strong change), the display changes to the second specific display depending on which button or other action effect is executed. The ratio is different).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation for the action effect.

(A4) In any of the game machines (A1) to (A3), the action effect is a plurality of types (for example, the weak action effect, the medium action effect, the strong action effect, etc. shown in FIG. 69 (C)). There are a plurality of types of display modes of the specific display after the change (for example, large button (white) D902 shown in FIGS. 67 and 74 to 80, large button (red) D903, stick D904, and large button (white). ) D902U, large button (red) D903U, stick D904U, etc.), and the ratio of which change to the specific display is different depending on which action effect is executed (for example, FIG. 69 (C). ), Weak effect effect, medium effect effect, strong effect effect in the case of weak change (1 step change), medium change (2 step change), and strong change (3 step change). Since the determination ratios of each of these are different, the ratio of weak change, medium change, and strong change is different depending on which button action effect is executed. For example, the small button (white) before the change. In the case of D901, when a weak change is executed, the small button (white) D901 changes to a large button (white) D902, and when a medium change is executed, the small button (white) D901 becomes a large button (red) D903. When it changes and a strong change is executed, the small button (white) D901 changes to the stick D904. Therefore, the ratio of which specific display is changed depending on which button or other action effect is executed. Is different).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation for the action effect.

(A5) In any of the gaming machines (A1) to (A4), the detection means has a plurality of types (for example, push button 9031B, stick controller 9031A, etc.), and corresponds to the specific display after the change. The motion effect detected by the detection means is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 79, the motion effect detected by the push button 9031B corresponding to the large button (white) D902 after the change is executed, and is shown in FIG. 75. As described above, the operation effect detected by the push button 31B corresponding to the large button (red) D903 after the change is executed, and as shown in FIGS. 77 and 80, the stick controller 9031A corresponding to the stick D904 after the change executes the operation effect. Execute the detected motion effect).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to pay attention to which operation means the specific display corresponds to.

(A6) In any of the gaming machines (A1) to (A5), the specific display executing means has an ineffective period of detection by the detecting means (for example, T4 to T11 shown in FIGS. 71 to 80, etc.). ), The specific display is displayed in an manner indicating that it is in the non-valid period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 71 to 80, a small button on which the regulation line K90 is superimposed (for example). (White) D901, large button (white) D902 on which the regulation line K90 is superimposed, large button (red) D903 on which the regulation line K90 is superimposed, and stick D904 on which the regulation line K90 is superimposed are displayed).

According to the above configuration, it is easy to understand that the period is non-valid.

(A7) In any of the gaming machines (A1) to (A6), the specific display executing means displays the specific display over a plurality of variable displays (for example, a plurality of (re) variable displays as pseudo-continuous fluctuations). It is possible to change by displaying the specific display over, displaying the specific display over multiple variable displays by pre-reading, etc.).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation over a plurality of variable displays.

(A8) A notice effect (for example, a cut-in effect) for notifying that any of the game machines (A1) to (A7) is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player. , Countdown effect, character drop effect, etc.), and the action effect is executed by executing the advance notice effect.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation for a specific advance notice effect.

(A9) In any of the game machines (A1) to (A8) above, the setting state related to the effect is set to the first state (for example, the state in which the auto button function is disabled) or the second state (for example, the state in which the auto button function is disabled). Setting means that can be set to the state in which the auto button function is enabled (for example, the auto button setting process shown in FIG. 81) and a specific effect (for example, button notice) when the effect execution condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the operation of the push button 9031B in the effects A to C and the decision button effect, it is possible to execute a display that reduces the scale of the gauge display, a notice display, a pass / fail display, etc.). The specific effect executing means (for example, the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 64) is provided, and the specific effect executing means executes the effect in the first state based on the detection result of the detection means. While the specific effect can be executed assuming that the condition is satisfied, in the second state, the specific effect can be executed assuming that the effect execution condition is satisfied regardless of the detection result of the detection means (for example, the auto button function). When is enabled, even if the push button 9031B is not operated, the notice display, the pass / fail display, the display that reduces the scale of the gauge display, etc. are performed), the setting means is While the variable display is being executed, the setting can be changed from the first state to the second state based on the detection result of the detection means (for example, a portion for executing the processes of steps S907103 to S907104 in FIG. 81).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the interest from being lowered.

(B1) The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and is a detecting means capable of detecting the movement of the player (for example, push button 9031B, stick controller 9031A, etc.). And the specific display corresponding to the detection means (for example, small button (white) D901, large button (white) D902, large button (red) D903, stick D904, small button shown in FIGS. 67 and 74 to 80). Specific display execution means for performing (white) D901U, large button (white) D902U, large button (red) D903U, stick D904U, etc. (for example, button development effect processing (S90529), variable display during effect processing (S90172), etc.) As the specific display, the specific display executing means has a first specific display (for example, a small button (white) D901, etc.) and an advantage for the player (for example, a big hit) over the first specific display. The second specific display (for example, the first specific display is a small button (white)) with a high degree of expectation, the degree of expectation that will be a 16R probability variation jackpot (see FIG. 49), and the degree of expectation that will be a probability variation jackpot when there is a normal jackpot and a probability variation jackpot. ) When the first specific display is the large button (white) D902, the large button (red) D903, the stick D904, etc., the second specific display is the large button (white) D902, and when the first specific display is the large button (white) D902, the second specific display Can display a large button (red) D903, stick D904, etc., and when the first specific display is a large button (red) D903, the second specific display is stick D904, etc.), and the detection by the detection means is not performed. During the valid period (for example, T4 to T11 shown in FIGS. 71 to 80), after displaying the first specific display, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, FIG. 74 (C). ) Is displayed, the small button (white) D901 is changed to the large button (white) D902 as shown in FIG. 75 (G), and the large button (white) D902 is further displayed. Is changed to a large button (red) D903 as shown in FIG. 75 (I)), and after the change in the valid period of detection by the detection means (for example, T11 to T13 shown in FIGS. 71 to 80). An operation effect using the second specific display (for example, large button (red) D903 or large button (red) D903U as shown in FIGS. 75 (J) and 75 (K)) (for example, FIG. 75 (K)). ) Is urged to operate, and the result is notified as shown in FIG. 75 (L).

According to the above configuration, the effect of production is improved. For example, since the specific display is changed during the non-valid period, the change can be shown and the effect of the effect is improved.

(B2) In the gaming machine of the above (B1), the first specific display is an action effect acting on the specific display (for example, a weak action effect, a medium action effect, and a strong action effect shown in FIG. 69 (C)). Is executed to change to the second specific display (for example, the small button (white) D901 shown in FIG. 76 (C) is a small button (for example, as shown in FIGS. 76 (D) and 76 (E)). White) The large button (white) D902 is changed to the large button (white) as shown in FIG. 76 (E) by executing the weak action effect for displaying the image JS901 and the image JS902 acting on the D901, and the large button (white) is changed to the large button (G) shown in FIG. 77 (G). As shown in FIGS. 77 (H) and 77 (I), the button (white) D902 is subjected to a medium-action effect of displaying the image TS901, the image TS902, and the image TS903 acting on the large button (white) D902. As shown in FIG. 77 (I), the stick D904 is changed, and the small button (white) D901 shown in FIG. 80 (A) is changed to the small button (white) as shown in FIGS. 80 (B) and 80 (C). ) The stick D904 is changed as shown in FIG. 80 (C) by executing the strong action effect of displaying the image KS901, the image KS902, and the image KS903 acting on the D901).

According to the above configuration, the effect effect is improved by the action effect.

(B3) In the game machine according to (B1) or (B2), there are a plurality of types of action effects acting on the specific display (for example, weak action effect, medium action effect, and strong action shown in FIG. 69 (C) and the like). There is an effect, etc.), and the rate of change to the second specific display differs depending on which of the action effects is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 69 (C), there is a change from no change). Since the determination ratios of the weak action effect, the medium action effect, and the strong action effect are different in the case of (weak change, medium change, or strong change), the second action effect depends on which button or the like action effect is executed. The rate of change to a specific display is different).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation for the action effect.

(B4) In any of the game machines (B1) to (B3), the action effects acting on the specific display include a plurality of types (for example, the weak action effect and the medium action effect shown in FIG. 69 (C). There are a plurality of types of display modes of the specific display after the change (for example, large button (white) D902, large button (red) D903, stick D904 shown in FIGS. 67 and 74 to 80). , Large button (white) D902U, large button (red) D903U, stick D904U, etc.), and the ratio of which change to the specific display differs depending on which action effect is executed (for example). , As shown in FIG. 69 (C), there are weak action effect and medium action in the case of weak change (1 step change), medium change (2 step change), and strong change (3 step change). Since the determination ratios of the effect and the strong effect are different, the ratio of weak change, medium change, and strong change is different depending on which button or other action effect is executed. For example, before the change In the case of the small button (white) D901, the small button (white) D901 changes to the large button (white) D902 when the weak change is executed, and the small button (white) D901 changes to the large button (white) D901 when the medium change is executed. It changes to (red) D903, and when a strong change is executed, the small button (white) D901 changes to stick D904. Therefore, which specific display is used depending on which button or other action effect is executed. The rate of change is different).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation for the action effect.

(B5) In any of the game machines (B1) to (B4), the detection means has a plurality of types (for example, push button 9031B, stick controller 9031A, etc.), and corresponds to the specific display after the change. The motion effect detected by the detection means is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 79, the motion effect detected by the push button 9031B corresponding to the large button (white) D902 after the change is executed, and is shown in FIG. 75. As described above, the operation effect detected by the push button 9031B corresponding to the large button (red) D903 after the change is executed, and as shown in FIGS. 77 and 80, the stick controller 9031A corresponding to the stick D904 after the change executes the operation effect. Execute the detected motion effect).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to pay attention to which operation means the specific display corresponds to.

(B6) In any of the gaming machines (B1) to (B5), the specific display executing means has a non-valid period of detection by the detecting means (for example, T4 to T11 shown in FIGS. 71 to 80, etc.). ), The specific display is displayed in an manner indicating that it is in the non-valid period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 71 to 80, a small button on which the regulation line K90 is superimposed (for example). (White) D901, large button (white) D902 on which the regulation line K90 is superimposed, large button (red) D903 on which the regulation line K90 is superimposed, and stick D904 on which the regulation line K90 is superimposed are displayed).

According to the above configuration, it is easy to understand that the period is non-valid.

(B7) In any of the game machines (B1) to (B6), the specific display executing means displays the specific display over a plurality of variable displays (for example, a plurality of (re) variable displays as pseudo-continuous fluctuations). It is possible to change by displaying the specific display over, displaying the specific display over multiple variable displays by pre-reading, etc.).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation over a plurality of variable displays.

(B8) A notice effect (for example, a cut-in effect) for notifying that any of the game machines (B1) to (B7) is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player. , Countdown effect, character drop effect, etc.), the action effect acting on the specific display is executed by executing the advance notice effect, and the second specific effect is executed by executing the action effect. Change to display.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation for a specific advance notice effect.

(B9) In any of the game machines (B1) to (B8) above, the setting state related to the effect is set to the first state (for example, the state in which the auto button function is disabled) or the second state (for example, the state in which the auto button function is disabled). Setting means that can be set to the state in which the auto button function is enabled (for example, the auto button setting process shown in FIG. 81) and a specific effect (for example, button notice) when the effect execution condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the operation of the push button 9031B in the effects A to C and the decision button effect, it is possible to execute a display that reduces the scale of the gauge display, a notice display, a pass / fail display, etc.). The specific effect executing means (for example, the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 64) is provided, and the specific effect executing means executes the effect in the first state based on the detection result of the detection means. While the specific effect can be executed assuming that the condition is satisfied, in the second state, the specific effect can be executed assuming that the effect execution condition is satisfied regardless of the detection result of the detection means (for example, the auto button function). When is enabled, even if the push button 9031B is not operated, the notice display, the pass / fail display, the display that reduces the scale of the gauge display, etc. are performed), the setting means is While the variable display is being executed, the setting can be changed from the first state to the second state based on the detection result of the detection means (for example, a portion for executing the processes of steps S907103 to S907104 in FIG. 81).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the interest from being lowered.

In the above (A1) to (A9) and the above (B1) to (B9), the "detection means" is not limited to the push button 9031B and the stick controller 9031A, and the object (object) provided in the housing is provided. A sensor or the like that detects an operation using a structure (for example, an operation of pushing all or a part of an object in the back direction or a downward direction, an operation of pulling in a front direction or an upward direction, an operation of rotating or sliding, etc.). You may. Further, it may be a sensor or the like that detects the contact of the player's body (hand, etc.) with the glass surface or the like, or a sensor that detects the movement of the player's body (hand, face, etc.) that does not come into contact with the game machine. And so on. That is, the "detection means" may be a touch sensor, an infrared sensor, a camera, or the like. When the "detection means" is, for example, a touch sensor capable of detecting a touch on the glass surface, the "specific display" is an image reminiscent of the touch on the glass surface (for example, an image imitating a palm). ) May be.

In addition to the above, changes and modifications can be made arbitrarily without departing from the spirit of the invention. For example, in the above description, when it is decided to execute the button development effect, the button development effect category is determined before the button development effect pattern is determined (see FIG. 68), but the button development effect pattern is directly determined. You may decide. That is, it is not necessary to use the concept of the button development effect category.

Further, the button development effect pattern shown in FIG. 67 is a button development effect pattern in which the "initial" is the "first mode (small button (white))", but the "initial" is the "second mode (large button)". (White)) ”,“ Third aspect (large button (red)) ”, and“ Fourth aspect (stick) ”are button development effect patterns.

Further, in the above embodiment, the timing of starting the display of the image of the button or the like is constant (T4), but the timing of starting the display of the image of the button or the like may have a plurality of timings. There may be a plurality of timings for each type of image such as a button.

Depending on the display start timing, the ratio of whether or not the image such as a button changes (growth) later and the ratio of how much the image changes may be different. For example, when the display start timing is late, the rate at which the image such as a button changes later is higher than when the display start timing is early, and the rate at which the stick is changed may be higher. Further, in a mode in which there are a plurality of types of timings from the non-valid period to the valid period (described later), the ratio of the timing from the non-valid period to the valid period may be different depending on the display start timing. For example, when the display start timing is late, the rate at which the timing from the non-valid period to the valid period becomes later than the predetermined timing may be higher than when it is early. Further, when there is a mode in which the non-valid period does not change to the valid period (described later), the ratio of whether or not the valid period is set may be different depending on the display start timing. For example, when the display start timing is late, the effective period may be higher than when it is early. Further, in the mode of executing the removal success effect (described later), the execution rate of the removal success effect may be different depending on the display start timing. For example, when the display start timing is late, the execution rate of the removal success effect may be higher than when it is early.

Further, the button development effect pattern shown in FIG. 67 changes an image such as a button at a maximum of two change timings out of three change timings (timing 1, timing 2, timing 3), but all (three). ) May change the image, such as a button. That is, a button development effect pattern is provided in which a weak change (1st → 2nd) occurs at timing 1, a weak change (2nd → 3rd) occurs at timing 2, and a weak change (3rd → 4th) occurs at timing 3. May be good. Further, the change timing does not have to be three times, and may be one, two, four or more times.

In addition, a button development effect pattern for notifying the confirmation of the jackpot may be provided. As an example, a large rainbow-colored button image ("large button (rainbow)") imitating the push button 9031B and a rainbow-colored stick controller image ("stick (rainbow)") imitating the stick controller 9031A are displayed as "sticks (rainbow)". A button development effect pattern (sometimes referred to as a "big hit confirmed button development effect pattern") in which the "final" is the "fifth aspect" is provided as the "fifth mode", and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (big hit) (big hit) In "PB4'-X" "PB5'-X"), the button development effect pattern for confirming the jackpot may be determined, but the fluctuation pattern of super reach (loss) ("PA4'-X" "PA5'-X") In "), the button development effect pattern for confirming the jackpot may not be determined.

Further, the operating means (push button 9031B, stick controller 9031A, etc.) may emit light at least a part (or the periphery), and the operating means may be changed according to an image such as a button. For example, when no image such as a button is displayed, both the light emitting part of the push button 9031B and the light emitting part of the stick controller 9031A are turned off, and when the small button (white) is displayed, the light emitting part of the push button 9031B is white. When the large button (white) is displayed, the light emitting part of the push button 9031B blinks in white (or lights in red), and when the large button (red) is displayed, the push button 9031B is lit. The light emitting portion of the stick controller 9031A may be lit in red (or blinking in red), and when the stick is displayed, the light emitting portion of the stick controller 9031A may be lit in white (or blinking in white). When the light emitting unit of the operating means is blinked, the image such as a button may also be blinked.

Further, in FIG. 67 and the like, the image such as a button corresponds to one of the two operating means (one of the operating means is valid). Specifically, the small button (white), the large button (white), and the large button (red) correspond to the push button 9031B, and the stick corresponds to the stick controller 9031A. Instead of this, an image such as a button corresponding to both of the two operating means may be displayed. As an example, in any case of the small button (white), the large button (white), the large button (red), and the stick, both the push button 9031B and the stick controller 9031A may be enabled. Since the operation means is changed on the way, by enabling both, it is possible to prevent the situation where the result (win / loss, etc.) is not displayed even though the operation is performed. Further, as another example, the logo mark corresponding to both the push button 9031B and the stick controller 9031A (for example, the logo mark related to the content used in the production of the pachinko game machine 901 and the brand name of the pachinko game machine 901 are related. Logo mark, etc.) may be displayed. That is, when the logo mark is displayed during the valid period, the result is displayed regardless of whether the push button 9031B is operated or the stick controller 9031A is operated.

Further, according to FIG. 69 (C), when the "strong action effect" is executed, it is expected to be mainly a "strong change", but a "medium change" or a "weak change" that is less than expected. In some cases. If the execution of the "strong action effect" results in a "medium change" or a "weak change", the expected "strong change" corresponds to a so-called downturn, and the player may be disappointed. Therefore, when it is a "weak change" or a "medium change", the "strong action effect" may not be determined. As a result, when the "strong action effect" is executed, the "strong change" is confirmed, and the player is not discouraged. Further, when the button image or the like changes after the execution of the "medium action effect", it is expected to be mainly a "medium change", but it may be a "weak change" less than expected. Therefore, when it is a "weak change", the "medium action effect" may not be determined. As a result, when the button image or the like changes after the "medium action effect" is executed, the "medium change" or more is confirmed, and the player is not discouraged. When there is no change, the "strong action effect" is not determined, but when there is no change, the "medium effect effect" may not be determined in addition to the "strong effect effect".

In addition, the degree of change (number of steps) of changes in images such as buttons is divided into "weak action effects" that change one step, "medium action effects" that change two steps, and "strong action effects" that change three steps. Etc.) to control (manage), but classify what changes the change of the image such as a button (for example, the second action effect that changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, the first aspect and the second aspect). It may be controlled by a third action effect that changes from the aspect to the third aspect, a first action effect, a second aspect, a fourth action effect that changes from the third aspect to the fourth aspect, and the like).

Further, in the above embodiment, the super reach is a so-called battle effect in which a ally character and an enemy character confront each other, but the super reach is not limited to the battle effect. For example, in the case of a big hit, the story may be completed successfully (in the case of a loss, the story may not be completed successfully). When the button development effect is executed in the story-based super reach, for example, depending on the operation during the valid period (as an action effect), the result of the story is replaced with the result of the battle effect (win or lose, etc.). (Whether or not the story is completed successfully) should be notified.

When the non-valid period changes to the valid period, the effect of removing the image (for example, the regulation line K90 shown in FIGS. 74 to 80) for notifying that the non-valid period is in effect (hereinafter, "removal effect"). In addition, it may be referred to as a “removal success effect” to distinguish it from the “removal failure effect” described later). For example, between FIGS. 79 (C) and 79 (D), the effect of removing the regulation line K90 superimposed on the large button (white) D902 (for example, a character (policeman, etc.) collects the regulation line K90). The effect of sucking the regulation line K90 to the vacuum cleaner, the effect of burning off the regulation line K90 with a flame, the effect of the large button (white) D902 itself shaking, etc., and the effect of removing the regulation line K90 may be performed. ..

Further, the removal failure effect (the effect in which at least a part of the effect mode is common to the removal success effect and the image for notifying that the non-valid period is in effect is not removed) may be executed. When the removal failure effect is executed, the super reach may be terminated without the valid period. That is, for example, when the removal success effect is executed in FIG. 79, FIG. 79 (C) → removal success effect → FIG. 79 (D) → FIG. 79 (E) → FIG. 79 (F) → FIG. 79 (G). ), On the other hand, when the removal failure effect is executed in FIG. 79, the transition may be made in the order of FIG. 79 (C) → removal failure effect → FIG. 79 (F) → FIG. 79 (G). ..

In addition, there are multiple types of timing from the non-valid period to the valid period, and when the non-valid period changes to the valid period late, the non-valid period is longer than when it is early, so images such as buttons are sufficient. It may be changed (grown) to. In addition to the case where the removal success effect is executed without executing the removal failure effect even once, the case where the removal success effect is executed after the removal failure effect is executed once or more, or the case where the removal failure effect is executed. The removal success effect may not be executed after being executed one or more times. As a result, when the image such as a button is not sufficiently grown, the player considers that the expiration date is premature and the removal success effect is not executed (for example, the effect of trying to remove the regulation line K90 starts. If this is done, it is hoped that the regulation line K90 will not be removed in the end, that is, the removal failure effect is being executed instead of the removal success effect), but the validity period is when the image such as a button is sufficiently grown. (For example, when the effect of removing the regulation line K90 is started, the regulation line K90 is finally removed, that is, not the removal failure effect. (The removal success effect is being executed). In other words, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the effect according to the situation is executed.

The image for notifying that the non-valid period is in effect may be another image instead of the image of the regulation line. For example, it may be an image of a chain and a key hung on an image of a button or the like, an image of a translucent case for storing an image of a button or the like, or ice to be shown on an image of a frozen button or the like. It may be.

Depending on the type of image for notifying that the non-valid period is in effect, the ratio of whether or not the image such as a button changes (growth) later and the ratio of how much the image changes may be different. For example, in the case of "chain and key", the rate of change of the image such as a button later may be higher than that of the case of "regulation line", and the rate of change of the stick may be higher. Further, in a mode in which there are a plurality of types of timings from the non-valid period to the valid period, the ratio of the timings from the non-valid period to the valid period differs depending on the type of the image for notifying that the non-valid period is in progress. You may let me. For example, in the case of "chain and key", the rate at which the timing from the non-valid period to the valid period becomes later than the predetermined timing may be higher than in the case of the "regulation line". Further, in the case where the non-valid period does not change to the valid period, the ratio of whether or not the valid period may be changed may be different depending on the image for notifying that the non-valid period is in effect. For example, in the case of "chain and key", the ratio of validity period may be higher than in the case of "regulation line". Further, in the mode of executing the removal success effect, the execution rate of the removal success effect may be different depending on the image for notifying that the non-valid period is in effect. For example, in the case of "chain and key", the execution rate of the removal success effect may be higher than in the case of "regulation line".

In addition, the image for notifying that the non-valid period is in progress may be changed (grown). For example, when it is a small button (white), it is set as "regulation line", when it is a large button (white), it is changed to "chain and key", and when it is a large button (red), it is changed to "semi-transparent case". The image for notifying that the non-valid period is in effect may be changed at the same timing as the change timing of the image such as a button, such as changing to "ice" when it becomes a stick. .. Also, for example, when it is a large button (white), it changes from "regulation line" to "chain and key", and when it is a stick, it changes from "chain and key" to "translucent case" and further "ice". The image for notifying that the non-valid period is in effect may be changed at a timing different from the change timing of the image such as a button, such as changing to.

In the embodiment of changing the image for notifying that it is in the non-valid period, the image for notifying that it is in the non-valid period may be changed by the action effect. The action effect of changing the image for notifying that the non-valid period is in effect may be the same (common) as the action effect of changing the image such as a button. It should be noted that, when a common action effect is executed, when the image for notifying that the image such as a button is also in the ineffective period also changes, and the image for notifying that the image such as the button is also in the ineffective period is notified. There may be times when both of the images for the purpose do not change, and times when either one of them changes. Further, the action effect of changing the image for notifying that the non-valid period is in effect and the action effect of changing the image such as a button may be different. That is, in addition to the action effect of changing the image such as a button, a dedicated action effect of changing the image for notifying that the non-valid period is in progress may be provided.

In addition, the same type of effect may change (grow) the image for notifying that it is in the non-valid period, or remove the image for notifying that it is in the non-valid period. There may be. That is, by executing the action effect of changing the image to notify that the non-valid period is in effect, the notification that the non-valid period is in effect is notified in the same manner as when the above-mentioned removal effect is executed. The image to be used may be removed. That is, when a certain effect (an effect having the properties of both an action effect and a removal effect) is executed, the image such as a button may or may not change, and it is notified that it is in an ineffective period. There may be times when the image is changed, times when it is removed, and times when nothing happens. It may be removed after the change (for example, the changed "ice" is removed after the change from the "translucent case" to the "ice"). Regarding the image for notifying that the image is in the non-valid period, two ways of being removed or not being removed have been described, but there are stages in the removal, and the image may be gradually removed. In other words, when a certain effect (effect that has both the properties of action effect and removal effect) or removal effect is executed, the "ice" breaks a little, and again, a certain effect (effect that has both the properties of action effect and removal effect) or removal. The "ice" may be completely cracked and removed when the effect is performed. If the image for notifying that it is in the non-valid period is in the process of being removed, it may not change, or it may be changeable and return to the original state after the change. It may be changeable and the above-mentioned intermediate state may be maintained after the change. For example, if the "translucent case" is slightly cracked, it may not change to "ice", it may change to unbroken "ice", or it may change to slightly cracked "ice". It may change.

Further, in the above embodiment, the hold data (first hold information) of the first special figure game and the hold data (second hold information) of the second special figure game are digested in the order of winning without distinguishing them (2). (See FIG. 60), the second reserved information may be preferentially digested.

Further, in the above embodiment, the “ratio” is not limited to the relationship such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B: C = 70%: 20%: 10%. As shown in 69 (B) and FIG. 70 (A), the relationship is such that A: B = 100%: 0% and A: B: C = 70%: 30%: 0% (that is, , 100% and 0% allocation exists) is also included in the concept.

Further, in the above embodiment, the number of rounds is two types of 8 rounds and 16 rounds, but the number of rounds may be 3 or more types. For example, there may be three types: 4R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, and 16R probability variation jackpot. Further, in the above embodiment, the gaming machine in which only the probabilistic jackpot is provided as the jackpot type is shown, but as described above, the gaming machine may include the non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot) as the jackpot type.

Further, in the above embodiment, a mode is shown in which a plurality of types of special symbols such as numbers indicating "0" to "8" and symbols indicating "-" are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed. Is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the special symbol to be variably displayed and the special symbol derived and displayed as the variable display result may be different. In other words, a special symbol that is not included in the fluctuating plurality of types of special symbols may be derived and displayed as a variable display result, and some of the fluctuating plurality of types of special symbols are not specially derived and displayed as a variable display result. May be included. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of special symbols, and the variable display may be performed using only one type of special symbol. As a variable display using one type of special symbol, for example, the one type of special symbol may be blinked (the lighting / extinguishing may be repeated alternately). That is, the repetition of turning on and off may be a variable display. Even in this case, the one type of special symbol may be derived and displayed (lit) at the end, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed at the end. It may be. The same applies to the variable display of other symbols (for example, ordinary symbols, decorative symbols, etc.).

Further, in the above embodiment, the jackpot game state is controlled based on the fact that the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, but the jackpot game state is controlled. The mode to be used is not limited to this. For example, a specific area is provided near the second start winning opening or inside the second starting winning opening, and the jackpot gaming state is controlled based on the entry (passage) of the game ball into the specific area. You may stay in.

Further, in the above embodiment, in order to notify the effect control board 9012 of the variation pattern indicating the variation time, the type of reach effect, the presence / absence of the pseudo-ream, etc., one variation pattern designation command is used when the variation is started. Is shown, but the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control board 9012 by two or more commands. Specifically, when notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 90100 uses the first command to indicate whether or not there is a pseudo-ream, whether or not there is a sliding effect, etc., before reaching (so-called when not reaching). A command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the second stop is sent, and the second command indicates the type of reach, the presence or absence of a re-lottery effect, etc. after reaching the reach (if it does not reach the so-called first). 2 After the stop, a command indicating the fluctuation time and the fluctuation mode may be transmitted. In this case, on the effect control board 9012 side, the effect control in the variable display may be performed based on the fluctuation time derived from the combination of the two commands. The game control microcomputer 90100 notifies the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and the effect control board 9012 selects the specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. May be good. When sending two commands, the two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined period has passed after the first command is sent (for example, the next timer interrupt). In), the second command may be sent. The variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the transmission order can be changed as appropriate. By notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands in this way, it is possible to reduce the amount of data that must be stored as the fluctuation pattern designation command.

Further, in the above embodiment, a random value determination table (display result determination table, jackpot type determination table, and variable category determination table) is stored in the main substrate 9011 and extracted from the main substrate 9011 at the time of starting winning. Based on the random number values (MR1'to MR3'), the main board 9011 refers to the random value value determination table, and performs random value determination processing (determination of whether or not a jackpot is achieved, determination of a variable category, and jackpot). In some cases, the determination of the type of jackpot) is executed, and the effect control board 9012 receives the determination result determined by the main board 9011 and executes the pre-reading advance notice effect based on the received determination result. However, the execution mode of the pre-reading notice effect is not limited to this. For example, the effect control board 9012 stores the above random number value determination table, and the main board 9011 transmits the random number value itself to the effect control board 9012 (for example, an effect control command capable of specifying the random number value from the main board 9011). Is transmitted to the effect control board 9012), the effect control board 9012 receives the random number value itself extracted from the main board 9011, and refers to the random number value determination table based on the received random number value. The determination process of the above may be executed, and the pre-reading advance notice effect may be executed based on the determination result of the determination process. That is, the random value determination process may be performed on the effect control board 9012. Further, the random value determination process may be performed on both the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012. For example, the effect control board 9012 may receive a part of the random numbers and execute the random value determination process, and may also receive the determination result determined on the main board 9011. Specifically, for example, the effect control board 9012 receives random values (MR1'and MR2') and determines whether or not it will be a big hit, and if it is a big hit, it executes a determination of the type of big hit. The determination result of the variation category determined by the main board 9011 based on the random number value (MR3') may be received. That is, the effect control board 9012 can execute the pre-reading advance notice effect based on the determination result determined by itself and the determination result determined by the main board 9011.

Further, the update timing of each random number may be different, or the update range of each random number may be different so that the random numbers may not be synchronized.

In the above-mentioned (means 1), the effecting accessory 201 is an example of an effecting device, the push button 120 is an example of a movable body, and the aspect (lighting of the accessory LED) shown in FIG. 37 (5) is an example of a specific effect. However, the effect display device (image display device) 9,905 is taken as an example of the effect device, and the effect display device 201 is configured to be operable (for example, movement, deformation, etc.), and the effect display device (image display device) 9,905. The movable accessory 9017 may be used as an example of the movable body, and the display effect on the effect display devices (image display devices) 9, 905 may be used as an example of the specific effect. That is, the effect display device (image display device) 9,905 may be used to perform the specific effect and the specific display.
Further, when the specific display is associated with the specific effect and the first specific display changes to the second specific display during the non-valid period of detection by the detection means, the specific effect is executed during the valid period of detection by the detection means. The movable body may be made easier to move. By doing so, when the first specific display changes to the second specific display during the non-valid period of detection by the detection means, the player's expectation that the specific effect is executed and the movable body operates is increased. It can be done and the game entertainment is improved.

Further, for example, a game machine that gives a game score for use in a game by using a frequency that is a game value of a size specified from the recording information of a game recording medium such as a prepaid card or a membership card. The present invention can be applied. The present invention can also be applied to a game machine in which a game player plays a game by driving a game ball enclosed in the game machine into a game area.

Further, in the above description, it has been explained that the ROM 90101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables prepared for the CPU 90103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. It does not necessarily have to be stored in a table format (including, for example, structures, arrays, etc.). That is, the determination values (determined values) to be compared with the extracted random number values may be collectively stored in the ROM 90101, or may be dispersed (spotted) in a plurality of locations of the ROM 90101 and stored. Alternatively, the ROM 90101 may store a mathematical formula or program that outputs a result (for example, a big hit or a loss in the example of FIG. 48) when the extracted random value is input. The same applies to the determination table and the like stored in the ROM 90121.

Further, in the above embodiment, the pachinko machine is shown as the game machine, but a medal is inserted to set a predetermined number of bets, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, so that the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.). For example, the slot machine to which the present invention is applied performs a detection means (effect button) capable of detecting the movement of the player and a specific display (effect button image imitating the effect button) corresponding to the detection means. The specific display executing means includes the specific display executing means, and the specific display executing means has a higher advantage for the player than the first specific display (effect button image (white)) and the first specific display as the specific display. (For example, there is a high expectation that it will be a bonus, etc.) The second specific display (effect button image (red)) can be displayed, and after the first specific display is displayed, the action effect that acts on the specific display. May be a slot machine capable of displaying the second specific display by executing.

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 901, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by pre-installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the programs and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

The present invention is suitably applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine in which a player can play a predetermined game.

1 Pachinko game machine 8a 1st special symbol display 8b 2nd special symbol display 9 effect display device 13 1st start winning opening 14 2nd starting winning opening 9a 1st reserved storage display 9b 2nd reserved storage display 20 special Variable winning ball device 31 Game control board (main board)
56 CPU
560 Game control microcomputer 80 Production control board 100 Production control microcomputer 101 Production control CPU
109 VDP
120 Push Button 122 Stick Controller 126 Vibrator Motor 201 Directional Character 202 Characteristic LED
303 Vibrated member 360 button LED
901 Pachinko game machine 902 Game board 903 Game machine frame 904A 1st special symbol display device 904B 2nd special symbol display device 905 image display device 905H Start winning prize storage display area 906A Normal winning ball device 906B Normal variable winning ball device 907 Special variable Winning ball device 908 Speaker 909 Lamp 9011 Main board 9012 Production control board 9013 Voice control board 9014 Lamp control board 9015 Relay board 9016 Accessory control board 9017 Movable accessory 9020 Normal symbol display 9021 Gate switch 9022A First start port switch 9022B 2 Start port switch 9023 Count switch 9031A Stick controller 9031B Push button 90100 Game control microcomputer 90101, 90121 ROM
90102, 90122 RAM
90103 CPU
90104, 90124 Random number circuit 90105, 90125 I / O
90120 Production control CPU
90123 Display control unit 90126 RTC circuit

Claims (1)

It is a game machine that can play games
A production device that can perform production and
Movable movable body and
A specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect in the vicinity of the movable body using the effect device,
A movable body control means for operating the movable body and
A detection means that can detect the movement of the player,
Specific display execution means for performing specific display corresponding to the detection means, and
With
The movable body control means can operate the movable body when the specific effect is executed.
The detecting means can detect a first operation with respect to the first operating means and a second operation with respect to the second operating means.
The specific display executing means is
As the specific display, the first specific display corresponding to the first operation with respect to the first operating means, the second operation corresponding to the second operating means, and more for the player than the first specific display. It is possible to display a second specific display having a high degree of advantage and a third specific display corresponding to the first operation with respect to the first operation means and having a higher degree of advantage to the player than the first specific display. Yes,
During the non-valid period of detection by the detection means, after displaying the first specific display, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display or the third specific display .
During the valid period of detection by the detection means, an operation effect using the second specific display or the third specific display after the change is executed .
When the first specific display is displayed in the non-valid period, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display, and an operation effect using the second specific display is executed in the valid period. However, after displaying the first specific display in the non-valid period, the first specific display is changed to the third specific display, and an operation effect using the third specific display is executed in the valid period. A gaming machine characterized in that it has a higher advantage for players than .